USER'S MANUAL ERRATA
This document contains the corrections of errors,
typos and omissions in the following document.
Samsung 8-bit CMOS S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Microprocessor User's Manual
Document Number: 21.1-S3-C84E5/C84E9/P84E9-082005
Publication: August 2005
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
ERRATA (VER 1.1)
Samsung 8-bit CMOS S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Microprocessor User’s Manual
Document Number: 21.1-S3-C84E5/C84E9/P84E9-082005
Publication: August 2005
1. Features (PAGE 1-2)
Built-in RESET circuit (LVR)
•
Low-Voltage reset (LVR value: 2.9 V)
Operating Voltage Range
• VLVR to 5.5V
2. Low Voltage Reset (PAGE 16-1)
The on-chip Low Voltage Reset, features static reset when supply voltage is below a reference voltage value
(Typical 2.9 V).
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
3. Low Voltage Reset (PAGE 16-2)
Watchdog RESET
nRESET
N.F
Longger than 1us
Internal System
RESET
VDD
When the VDD level
is lower than 2.9V
VIN
+
Comparator
-
N.F
VREF
Longger than 1us
VDD
VREF
BGR
NOTES:
1. The target of voltage detection level is 2.9 V at VDD = 5 V
2. BGR is Band Gap voltage Reference
Figure 16-1. Low Voltage Reset Circuit
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
4. Table 17-3. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (PAGE 17-3)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
VIH1
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
All port and nRESET
0.8 VDD
VDD
Input high voltage
–
V
VIH2
VDD = VLVR (to 5.5 V
XIN and XTIN
VDD – 0.5
VIL1
VIL2
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
All ports and nRESET
0.2VDD
0.4
Input low voltage
–
–
V
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
XIN and XTIN
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
5. Table 17-3. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (PAGE 17-4)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
RP1
Pull-up resistor
10
50
100
VDD = 5 V; VIN = 0 V , TA = 25°C
kΩ
All I/O pins except nRESET
20
50
100
–
100
250
500
15
400
600
1000
30
V
DD = 3 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
All I/O pins except nRESET
DD = 5 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
nRESET only
DD = 3 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
nRESET only
DD = 4.5V to 5.5V
RP2
V
V
(2)
Supply current (1)
IDD1
V
mA
RUN mode
12 MHz CPU clock
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
8 MHz CPU clock
4
10
7
IDD2
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
3.4
Idle mode
12 MHz CPU clock
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
8 MHz CPU clock
1
2.5
IDD3
IDD4
IDD5
Sub operating: main-osc stop
–
–
–
100
150
uA
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
32768 Hz crystal oscillator
Sub idle mode: main-osc stop
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
90
80
140
100
32768 Hz crystal oscillator
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
TA = 25 °C
Stop mode
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V,
TA = 25 °C
–
45
80
Stop mode
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
6. Table 17-4. A.C. Electrical Characteristics (PAGE 17-5)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
7. Table 17-5. Main Oscillator Frequency (PAGE 17-6)
(TA = – 25 °C + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Oscillator
Clock Circuit
Test Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
Main crystal or
ceramic
1
–
12
MHz
XIN
XOUT
C1
C2
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
External clock
(main system)
1
–
12
XIN
XOUT
8. Table 17-6. Main Oscillator Clock Stabilization Time(PAGE 17-6)
(TA = – 25 °C + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
9. Table 17-7. Sub Oscillator Frequency (PAGE 17-7)
°
°
(TA = –25 C + 85 C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Oscillator
Crystal
Clock Circuit
Test Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
Crystal oscillation frequency
C1 = 100 pF, C2 = 100 pF
R = 330 Ω
32
32.768
34
kHz
XTIN XTOUT
R
XTIN and XTOUT are connected
C1
C2
with R and C by soldering.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
10. Table 17-8. Subsystem Oscillator (crystal) Stabilization Time (PAGE 17-7)
°
(TA = 25 C)
Oscillator
Test Condition
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
Normal mode
–
800
1600
ms
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
–
–
–
10
s
Strong mode
400
150
800
300
ms
11. Table 17-9. Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode (PAGE 17-8)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
12. Table 17-10. UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (PAGE 17-10)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V, Load capacitance = 80 pF)
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
ns
tSCK
Serial port clock cycle time
500
700
tCPU × 6
tS1
Output data setup to clock rising edge
Serial port clock High, Low level width
300
200
–
tCPU × 5
tHIGH, tLOW
400
tCPU × 3
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
USER’S MANUAL ERRATA
13. Table 17-11. A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics (PAGE 17-11)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
14. Table 17-12. LVR (Low Voltage Reset) Circuit Characteristics (PAGE 17-12)
°
(TA = 25 C)
Parameter
LVR voltage level
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
°
VLVR
2.6
2.9
3.2
V
TA = 25 C
15. Figure 17-8. Operating Voltage Range(PAGE 17-12)
Main Oscillator Frequency
CPU Clock
12 MHz
8 MHz
1 MHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VLVR
5.5 V
Supply Voltage (V)
Minimum instruction clock = 1/4 Oscillator clock
16. Table 19-2. Comparison of S3P84E9 and S3C84E5/C84E9 Features (PAGE 17-12)
Characteristic
S3P84E9
S3C84E5/C84E9
VLVR to 5.5 V
Operating voltage (VDD
)
VLVR to 5.5 V
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Notice
The information in this publication has been carefully
checked and is believed to be entirely accurate at the
time of publication. Samsung assumes no
responsibility, however, for possible errors or
omissions, or for any consequences resulting from
the use of the information contained herein.
"Typical" parameters can and do vary in different
applications. All operating parameters, including
"Typicals" must be validated for each customer
application by the customer's technical experts.
Samsung products are not designed, intended, or
authorized for use as components in systems
intended for surgical implant into the body, for other
applications intended to support or sustain life, or for
any other application in which the failure of the
Samsung product could create a situation where
personal injury or death may occur.
Samsung reserves the right to make changes in its
products or product specifications with the intent to
improve function or design at any time and without
notice and is not required to update this
documentation to reflect such changes.
This publication does not convey to a purchaser of
semiconductor devices described herein any license
under the patent rights of Samsung or others.
Should the Buyer purchase or use a Samsung
product for any such unintended or unauthorized
application, the Buyer shall indemnify and hold
Samsung and its officers, employees, subsidiaries,
affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims,
costs, damages, expenses, and reasonable attorney
fees arising out of, either directly or indirectly, any
claim of personal injury or death that may be
associated with such unintended or unauthorized use,
even if such claim alleges that Samsung was
negligent regarding the design or manufacture of said
product.
Samsung makes no warranty, representation, or
guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for
any particular purpose, nor does Samsung assume
any liability arising out of the application or use of any
product or circuit and specifically disclaims any and
all liability, including without limitation any
consequential or incidental damages.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers
User's Manual, Revision 1.1
Publication Number: 21.1-S3-C84E5/C84E9/P84E9-082005
© 2005 Samsung Electronics
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electric or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
consent of Samsung Electronics.
Samsung Electronics' microcontroller business has been awarded full ISO-14001
certification (BSI Certificate No. FM24653). All semiconductor products are designed
and manufactured in accordance with the highest quality standards and objectives.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
San #24 Nongseo-Ri, Giheung-Eup
Yongin-City, Gyeonggi-Do, Korea
C.P.O. Box #37, Suwon 440-900
TEL:
FAX:
(82)-(31)-209-5238
(82)-(31)-209-6494
Home Page: http://www.samsung.com
Printed in the Republic of Korea
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Microcontroller User's Manual is designed for application designers and programmers
who are using the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller for application development. It is organized in two main
parts:
Part I
Programming Model
Part II
Hardware Descriptions
Part I contains software-related information to familiarize you with the microcontroller's architecture, programming
model, instruction set, and interrupt structure. It has six chapters:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Product Overview
Address Spaces
Addressing Modes
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Control Registers
Interrupt Structure
Instruction Set
Chapter 1, "Product Overview," is a high-level introduction to S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 with general product
descriptions, as well as detailed information about individual pin characteristics and pin circuit types.
Chapter 2, "Address Spaces," describes program and data memory spaces, the internal register file, and register
addressing. Chapter 2 also describes working register addressing, as well as system stack and user-defined stack
operations.
Chapter 3, "Addressing Modes," contains detailed descriptions of the addressing modes that are supported by the
S3C8-series CPU.
Chapter 4, "Control Registers," contains overview tables for all mapped system and peripheral control register values,
as well as detailed one-page descriptions in a standardized format. You can use these easy-to-read, alphabetically
organized, register descriptions as a quick-reference source when writing programs.
Chapter 5, "Interrupt Structure," describes the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure in detail and further
prepares you for additional information presented in the individual hardware module descriptions in Part II.
Chapter 6, "Instruction Set," describes the features and conventions of the instruction set used for all S3C8-series
microcontrollers. Several summary tables are presented for orientation and reference. Detailed descriptions of each
instruction are presented in a standard format. Each instruction description includes one or more practical examples
of how to use the instruction when writing an application program.
A basic familiarity with the information in Part I will help you to understand the hardware module descriptions in Part
II. If you are not yet familiar with the S3C8-series microcontroller family and are reading this manual for the first time,
we recommend that you first read Chapters 1–3 carefully. Then, briefly look over the detailed information in Chapters
4, 5, and 6. Later, you can reference the information in Part I as necessary.
Part II "hardware Descriptions," has detailed information about specific hardware components of the
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller. Also included in Part II are electrical, mechanical, OTP, and development
tools data. It has 14 chapters:
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
Chapter 13
Clock Circuit
RESET and Power-Down
I/O Ports
Chapter 14
Chapter 15
Chapter 16
Chapter 17
Chapter 18
Chapter 19
Chapter 20
Watch Timer
A/D Converter
Low Voltage Reset
Electrical Data
Mechanical Data
S3P84E9 OTP version
Development Tools
Basic Timer
8-bit Timer A/B
16-bit Timer 1(0,1)
UART
Two order forms are included at the back of this manual to facilitate customer order for S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
microcontrollers: the Mask ROM Order Form, and the Mask Option Selection Form. You can photocopy these
forms, fill them out, and then forward them to your local Samsung Sales Representative.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Part I — Programming Model
Chapter 1
Product Overview
S3C8-SERIES Microcontrollers.............................................................................................................1-1
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Microcontroller................................................................................................1-1
Features.............................................................................................................................................1-2
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................1-3
Pin Assignment...................................................................................................................................1-4
Pin Assignment...................................................................................................................................1-5
Pin Descriptions..................................................................................................................................1-6
Pin Circuits.........................................................................................................................................1-8
Chapter 2
Address Spaces
Overview.............................................................................................................................................2-1
Program Memory (ROM)......................................................................................................................2-2
Register Architecture...........................................................................................................................2-3
Register Page Pointer (PP)..........................................................................................................2-5
Register Set 1.............................................................................................................................2-7
Register Set 2.............................................................................................................................2-7
Prime Register Space..................................................................................................................2-8
Working Registers.......................................................................................................................2-9
Using the Register Pointers..........................................................................................................2-10
Register Addressing ............................................................................................................................2-12
Common Working Register Area (C0h–Cfh)....................................................................................2-14
4-Bit Working Register Addressing................................................................................................2-15
8-Bit Working Register Addressing................................................................................................2-17
System and User Stack.......................................................................................................................2-19
Chapter 3
Addressing Modes
Overview.............................................................................................................................................3-1
Register Addressing Mode (R)..............................................................................................................3-2
Indirect Register Addressing Mode (IR)..................................................................................................3-3
Indexed Addressing Mode (X) ...............................................................................................................3-7
Direct Address Mode (DA)....................................................................................................................3-10
Indirect Address Mode (IA)...................................................................................................................3-12
Relative Address Mode (RA).................................................................................................................3-13
Immediate Mode (IM)...........................................................................................................................3-14
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 4
Control Registers
Overview.............................................................................................................................................4-1
Chapter 5
Interrupt Structure
Overview.............................................................................................................................................5-1
Interrupt Types ............................................................................................................................5-2
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Interrupt Structure ...................................................................................5-3
Interrupt Vector Addresses...........................................................................................................5-5
Enable/Disable Interrupt Instructions (EI, DI) ..................................................................................5-7
System-Level Interrupt Control Registers .......................................................................................5-7
Interrupt Processing Control Points...............................................................................................5-8
Peripheral Interrupt Control Registers ............................................................................................5-9
System Mode Register (SYM)......................................................................................................5-10
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR).......................................................................................................5-11
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) .....................................................................................................5-12
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) ...................................................................................................5-14
Interrupt Pending Function Types..................................................................................................5-15
Interrupt Source Polling Sequence................................................................................................5-16
Interrupt Service Routines.............................................................................................................5-16
Generating Interrupt Vector Addresses ..........................................................................................5-17
Nesting of Vectored Interrupts.......................................................................................................5-17
Chapter 6
Instruction Set
Overview.............................................................................................................................................6-1
Data Types .................................................................................................................................6-1
Register Addressing ....................................................................................................................6-1
Addressing Modes.......................................................................................................................6-1
Flags Register (FLAGS)...............................................................................................................6-6
Flag Descriptions ........................................................................................................................6-7
Instruction Set Notation................................................................................................................6-8
Condition Codes..........................................................................................................................6-12
Instruction Descriptions................................................................................................................6-13
vi
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents (Continued)
Part II Hardware Descriptions
Chapter 7
Clock Circuit
Overview.............................................................................................................................................7-1
System Clock Circuit...................................................................................................................7-1
Clock Status During Power-Down Modes.......................................................................................7-2
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON).....................................................................................7-3
Chapter 8
RESET and Power-Down
System Reset.....................................................................................................................................8-1
Overview.....................................................................................................................................8-1
Normal Mode RESET Operation....................................................................................................8-1
Hardware RESET Values .............................................................................................................8-2
Power-Down Modes.............................................................................................................................8-5
Stop Mode..................................................................................................................................8-5
Idle Mode....................................................................................................................................8-6
Chapter 9
I/O Ports
Overview.............................................................................................................................................9-1
Port Data Registers .....................................................................................................................9-2
Port 0.........................................................................................................................................9-3
Port 1.........................................................................................................................................9-5
Port 2.........................................................................................................................................9-7
Port 3.........................................................................................................................................9-12
Port 4.........................................................................................................................................9-14
Chapter 10
Basic Timer
Overview.............................................................................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer (BT) .........................................................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)..........................................................................................10-1
Basic Timer Function Description..................................................................................................10-3
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 11
8-bit Timer A/B
8-Bit Timer A.......................................................................................................................................11-1
Overview.....................................................................................................................................11-1
Function Description....................................................................................................................11-2
Timer A Control Register (TACON)................................................................................................11-3
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................11-4
8-Bit Timer B.......................................................................................................................................11-5
Overview.....................................................................................................................................11-5
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................11-5
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)................................................................................................11-6
Timer B Pulse Width Calculations.................................................................................................11-7
Chapter 12
16-bit Timer 1(0, 1)
Overview.............................................................................................................................................12-1
Function Description....................................................................................................................12-2
Timer 1(0,1) Control Register (T1CON0, T1CON1)...........................................................................12-3
Block Diagram ............................................................................................................................12-6
Chapter 13
UART
Overview.............................................................................................................................................13-1
Programming Procedure...............................................................................................................13-1
Uart Control Register (UARTCON).................................................................................................13-2
Uart Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND)...................................................................................13-4
Uart Data Register (UDATA).........................................................................................................13-5
Uart Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATAH, BRDATAL)....................................................................13-6
Baud Rate Calculations................................................................................................................13-6
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................................13-8
Uart Mode 0 Function Description.................................................................................................13-9
Uart Mode 1 Function Description.................................................................................................13-10
Uart Mode 2 Function Description.................................................................................................13-11
Serial Communication for Multiprocessor Configurations..................................................................13-13
Chapter 14
Watch Timer
Overview.............................................................................................................................................14-1
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON: R/W)...............................................................................14-2
Watch Timer Circuit Diagram........................................................................................................14-3
viii
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter
Chapter 15
Overview.............................................................................................................................................15-1
Function Description............................................................................................................................15-1
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON).......................................................................................15-2
Internal Reference Voltage Levels..................................................................................................15-4
Conversion Timing .......................................................................................................................15-4
Internal A/D Conversion Procedure................................................................................................15-5
Chapter 16
Low Voltage RESET
Overview.............................................................................................................................................16-1
Chapter 17
Electrical Data
Overview.............................................................................................................................................17-1
Chapter 18
Mechanical Data
Overview.............................................................................................................................................18-1
Chapter 19
S3P84E9 OTP Version
Overview.............................................................................................................................................19-1
Operating Mode Characteristics....................................................................................................19-3
Chapter 20
Development Tools
Overview.............................................................................................................................................20-1
Shine .........................................................................................................................................20-1
Sasm .........................................................................................................................................20-1
Sama Assembler.........................................................................................................................20-1
HEX2ROM..................................................................................................................................20-1
Target Boards .............................................................................................................................20-2
Otp ............................................................................................................................................20-2
Otp Programming Socket Adapter.................................................................................................20-2
TB84E5/84E9 Target Board..........................................................................................................20-3
Idle Led ......................................................................................................................................20-4
Stop Led.....................................................................................................................................20-4
Port (P0.0, P0.1) Selection (SUB-OSC or normal input)..................................................................20-4
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Figures
Figure
Title
Page
Number
Number
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Block Diagram................................................................1-3
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Assignment (44-pin QFP)...........................................1-4
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Assignment (42-pin SDIP)..........................................1-5
Pin Circuit Type B (RESETB)...............................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type C...............................................................................................1-8
Pin Circuit Type D (P0.2-P0.7, P1, P4.3-P4.5) .......................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type D-1 (P2, and P4.0-P4.2)...............................................................1-9
Pin Circuit Type E (P3) ........................................................................................1-10
Pin Circuit Type F (P0.0, P0.1).............................................................................1-10
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Program Memory Address Space.........................................................................2-2
Internal Register File Organization.........................................................................2-4
Register Page Pointer (PP)..................................................................................2-5
Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register.........................................................................2-8
8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices).................................................................2-9
Contiguous 16 Byte Working Register Block..........................................................2-10
Non-Contiguous 16 Byte Working Register Block...................................................2-11
16-Bit Register Pair .............................................................................................2-12
Register File Addressing......................................................................................2-13
Common Working Register Area...........................................................................2-14
4-Bit Working Register Addressing........................................................................2-16
4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example..........................................................2-16
8-Bit Working Register Addressing........................................................................2-17
8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example..........................................................2-18
Stack Operations ................................................................................................2-19
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
Register Addressing ............................................................................................3-2
Working Register Addressing ...............................................................................3-2
Indirect Register Addressing to Register File..........................................................3-3
Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory ...................................................3-4
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File.............................................3-5
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory...........................3-6
Indexed Addressing to Register File......................................................................3-7
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset...........................3-8
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory....................................................3-9
Direct Addressing for Load Instructions..................................................................3-10
Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions ....................................................3-11
Indirect Addressing..............................................................................................3-12
Relative Addressing.............................................................................................3-13
Immediate Addressing .........................................................................................3-14
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
4-1
Register Description Format .................................................................................4-4
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Figures (Continued)
Figure
Title
Page
Number
Number
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
S3C8-Series Interrupt Types.................................................................................5-2
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Interrupt Structure ...........................................................5-4
ROM Vector Address Area...................................................................................5-5
Interrupt Function Diagram ...................................................................................5-8
System Mode Register (SYM)..............................................................................5-10
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)...............................................................................5-11
Interrupt Request Priority Groups ..........................................................................5-12
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) .............................................................................5-13
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) ...........................................................................5-14
6-1
System Flags Register (FLAGS)...........................................................................6-6
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
Main Oscillator Circuit (Crystal or Ceramic Oscillator).............................................7-1
Sub-System Oscillator Circuit (Crystal Oscillator)...................................................7-1
System Clock Circuit Diagram..............................................................................7-2
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON).............................................................7-3
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)...................................................................7-4
STOP Control Register (STPCON) ........................................................................7-4
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
Port 0 High Byte Control Register (P0CONH).........................................................9-3
Port 0 Low Byte Control Register (P0CONL) ..........................................................9-4
Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH).........................................................9-5
Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL) ..........................................................9-6
Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH).........................................................9-8
Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL) ..........................................................9-9
Port 2 Interrupt Pending Register (P2INTPND)........................................................9-10
Port 2 Interrupt Control Register (P2INT) ................................................................9-11
Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH).........................................................9-12
Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL) ..........................................................9-13
Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH).........................................................9-15
Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL) ..........................................................9-15
Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register (P4INTPND)........................................................9-16
Port 4 Interrupt Control Register (P4INT) ................................................................9-16
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
10-1
10-2
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)..................................................................10-2
Basic Timer Block Diagram..................................................................................10-4
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
Timer A Control Register (TACON)........................................................................11-3
Timer A Functional Block Diagram........................................................................11-4
Timer B Functional Block Diagram........................................................................11-5
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)........................................................................11-6
Timer B Data Registers (TBDATAH, TBDATAL)......................................................11-6
Timer B Output Flip Flop Waveforms in Repeat Mode .............................................11-8
xii
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Figures (Concluded)
Page
Title
Page
Number
Number
12-1
12-2
12-3
Timer 1(0,1) Control Register (T1CON0, T1CON1)...................................................12-4
Timer A, Timer 1(0,1) Pending Register (TINTPND).................................................12-5
Timer 1(0,1) Functional Block Diagram..................................................................12-6
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
UART Control Register (UARTCON) ......................................................................13-3
UART Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND) ........................................................13-4
UART Data Register (UDATA)...............................................................................13-5
UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATAH, BRDATAL).........................................13-6
UART Functional Block Diagram...........................................................................13-8
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 0 Operation ..........................................................13-9
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 1 Operation ..........................................................13-10
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 2 Operation ..........................................................13-12
Connection Example for Multiprocessor Serial Data Communications.......................13-14
14-1
Watch Timer Circuit Diagram................................................................................14-3
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)...............................................................15-2
A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH, ADDATAL)..............................................15-3
A/D Converter Circuit Diagram ..............................................................................15-3
A/D Converter Timing Diagram..............................................................................15-4
Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy........................15-5
16-1
Low Voltage Reset Circuit....................................................................................16-2
Input Timing for External Interrupts (Ports 4 and 6)..................................................17-5
17-1
17-3
Clock Timing Measurement at X .........................................................................17-7
IN
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-7
17-8
17-9
Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by RESET......................................................17-8
Stop Mode (Main) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts .........................................17-8
Stop Mode (Sub) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts...........................................17-9
Waveform for UART Timing Characteristics............................................................17-10
Operating Voltage Range .....................................................................................17-12
The Circuit Diagram to Improve EFT Characteristics................................................17-12
18-1
18-2
42-SDIP-600 Package Dimensions........................................................................18-1
44-QFP-1010 Package Dimensions.......................................................................18-2
19-1
19-2
S3P84E9 Pin Assignments (42-SDIP Package) .....................................................19-1
S3P84E9 Pin Assignments (44-QFP Package)......................................................19-2
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
SMDS+ or SK-1000 Product Configuration.............................................................20-2
S3C84E5/S3C84E9/S3P84E9 Target Board Configuration.......................................20-3
44-Pin Connector pin assignment for TB84E5/84E9................................................20-5
TB84E5/84E9 Adapter Cable for 44pin Connector Package .....................................20-6
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Tables
Table
Title
Page
Number
Number
1-1
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Descriptions..............................................................1-6
2-1
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Register Type Summary ..................................................2-3
4-1
4-2
4-3
Set 1 Registers ...................................................................................................4-1
Set 1, Bank 0 Registers.......................................................................................4-2
Set 1, Bank 1 Registers.......................................................................................4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
Interrupt Vectors..................................................................................................5-6
Interrupt Control Register Overview........................................................................5-7
Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers...........................................................5-9
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
Instruction Group Summary..................................................................................6-2
Flag Notation Conventions....................................................................................6-8
Instruction Set Symbols.......................................................................................6-8
Instruction Notation Conventions ...........................................................................6-9
OPCODE Quick Reference...................................................................................6-10
Condition Codes..................................................................................................6-12
8-1
8-2
8-3
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Set 1 Register Values After RESET..................................8-2
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values After RESET......................8-3
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values After RESET......................8-4
9-1
9-2
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Port Configuration Overview..............................................9-1
Port Data Register Summary................................................................................9-2
14-1
Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON): Set 1, Bank 0, FAH, R/W.........................14-2
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-4
17-2
17-5
Absolute Maximum Ratings..................................................................................17-2
Input/Output Capacitance.....................................................................................17-2
D.C. Electrical Characteristics..............................................................................17-3
A.C. Electrical Characteristics..............................................................................17-5
Input Timing for RESET........................................................................................17-5
Main Oscillator Frequency (f
).......................................................................17-6
OSC1
17-6
17-7
17-8
Main Oscillator Clock Stabilization Time (t )......................................................17-6
ST1
Sub Oscillator Frequency (f
) ........................................................................17-7
OSC2
Subsystem Oscillator (crystal) Stabilization Time (t
).........................................17-7
ST2
17-9
Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode.........................................................17-8
UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (10 MHz)..................................................17-10
A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics ................................................................17-11
LVR(Low Voltage Reset) Circuit Characteristics...................................................17-12
17-10
17-11
17-12
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Tables (Continued)
Table
Title
Page
Number
Number
19-1
19-2
19-3
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the OTP ..................................................19-3
Comparison of S3P84E9 and S3C84E5/C84E9 Features.........................................19-3
Operating Mode Selection Criteria.........................................................................19-3
20-1
20-2
20-3
Power Selection Settings for TB84E5/84E9............................................................20-4
Using Single Header Pins as the Input Path for External Trigger Sources..................20-4
The Port 0.0 and Port 0.1 selection setting ............................................................20-5
xvi
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Programming Tips
Description
Chapter 2:
Page
Number
Address Spaces
Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page 1)..........................................................................2-6
Setting the Register Pointers................................................................................................................2-10
Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers ..................................................................2-11
Addressing the Common Working Register Area....................................................................................2-15
Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP.................................................................................2-20
Chapter 11:
8-bit Timer A/B
To Generate 38 kHz, 1/3duty signal through P4.3...................................................................................11-9
To generate a one pulse signal through P4.3..........................................................................................11-10
Using the Timer A................................................................................................................................11-11
Using the Timer B................................................................................................................................11-12
Chapter 12:
16-bit Timer 1(0,1)
Using the Timer 1(0) ............................................................................................................................12-7
Chapter 14:
Watch Timer
Using the Watch Timer ........................................................................................................................14-4
Chapter 15:
A/D Converter
Configuring A/D Converter.....................................................................................................................15-6
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Register Descriptions
Register
Identifier
Full Register Name
Page
Number
ADCON
BTCON
CLKCON
FLAGS
IMR
IPH
IPL
IPR
IRQ
OSCCON
P0CONH
P0CONL
P1CONH
P1CONL
P2CONH
P2CONL
P2INT
P2INTPND
P3CONH
P3CONL
P4CONH
P4CONL
P4INT
P4INTPND
PP
RP0
RP1
SPH
SPL
STPCON
SYM
T1CON0
T1CON1
TACON
TBCON
TINTPND
UARTCON
UARTPND
WTCON
A/D Converter Control Register F7H Set 1, Bank 0.................................................4-5
Basic Timer Control Register H Set 1....................................................................4-6
System Clock Control Register D4H Set 1.............................................................4-7
System Flags Register D5H Set 1........................................................................4-8
Interrupt Mask Register DDH Set 1.......................................................................4-9
Instruction Pointer (High Byte) DAH Set 1..............................................................4-10
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte) DBH Set 1..............................................................4-10
Interrupt Priority Register FFH Set 1, Bank 0.........................................................4-11
Interrupt Request Register DCH Set 1...................................................................4-12
Oscillator Control Register FBH Set 1,Bank 0......................................................4-13
Port 0 Control Register (High Byte) E6H Set 1, Bank 0...........................................4-14
Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte) E7H Set 1, Bank 0............................................4-15
Port 1 Control Register (High Byte) E8H Set 1, Bank 0...........................................4-16
Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte) E9H Set 1, Bank 0............................................4-17
Port 2 Control Register (High Byte) EAH Set 1, Bank 0...........................................4-18
Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte) EBH Set 1, Bank 0...........................................4-19
Port 2 Interrupt Control Register ECH Set 1, Bank 0...............................................4-20
Port 2 Interrupt Pending Register EDH Set 1, Bank 0..............................................4-21
Port 3 Control Register (High Byte) EEH Set 1, Bank 0...........................................4-22
Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte) EFH Set 1, Bank 0............................................4-23
Port 4 Control Register (High Byte) F0H Set 1, Bank 0...........................................4-24
Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte) F1H Set 1, Bank 0............................................4-25
Port 4 Interrupt Control Register F2H Set 1, Bank 0................................................4-26
Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register F3H Set 1, Bank 0..............................................4-27
Register Page Pointer DFH Set 1..........................................................................4-28
Register Pointer 0 D6H Set 1................................................................................4-29
Register Pointer 1 D7H Set 1................................................................................4-29
Stack Pointer (High Byte) D8H Set 1.....................................................................4-30
Stack Pointer (Low Byte) D9H Set 1.....................................................................4-30
Stop Control Register E5H Set 1, Bank 0..............................................................4-31
System Mode Register DEH Set 1........................................................................4-32
Timer 1(0) Control Register E8H Set 1, Bank 1.......................................................4-33
Timer 1(1) Control Register E9H Set 1, Bank 1.......................................................4-34
Timer A Control Register E1H Set 1, Bank 1..........................................................4-35
Timer B Control Register D0H Set 1......................................................................4-36
Timer A, Timer 1 Interrupt Pending Register E0H Set 1, Bank 1...............................4-37
UART Control Register F6H Set 1, Bank 0.............................................................4-38
UART Pending and parity control F4H Set 1, Bank 0..............................................4-40
Watch Timer Control Register FAH Set 1, Bank 0..................................................4-41
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Instruction Descriptions
Instruction
Mnemonic
Full Register Name
Page
Number
ADC
ADD
AND
BAND
BCP
BITC
BITR
BITS
BOR
BTJRF
BTJRT
BXOR
CALL
CCF
CLR
COM
CP
Add with Carry ....................................................................................................6-14
Add....................................................................................................................6-15
Logical AND........................................................................................................6-16
Bit AND..............................................................................................................6-17
Bit Compare........................................................................................................6-18
Bit Complement ..................................................................................................6-19
Bit Reset ............................................................................................................6-20
Bit Set................................................................................................................6-21
Bit OR................................................................................................................6-22
Bit Test, Jump Relative on False...........................................................................6-23
Bit Test, Jump Relative on True.............................................................................6-24
Bit XOR..............................................................................................................6-25
Call Procedure ....................................................................................................6-26
Complement Carry Flag .......................................................................................6-27
Clear..................................................................................................................6-28
Complement .......................................................................................................6-29
Compare.............................................................................................................6-30
Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal...............................................................6-31
Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal........................................................6-32
Decimal Adjust....................................................................................................6-33
Decimal Adjust....................................................................................................6-34
Decrement..........................................................................................................6-35
Decrement Word.................................................................................................6-36
Disable Interrupts ................................................................................................6-37
Divide (Unsigned).................................................................................................6-38
Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero ..........................................................................6-39
Enable Interrupts.................................................................................................6-40
Enter..................................................................................................................6-41
Exit....................................................................................................................6-42
Idle Operation......................................................................................................6-43
Increment ...........................................................................................................6-44
Increment Word...................................................................................................6-45
Interrupt Return ...................................................................................................6-46
Jump..................................................................................................................6-47
Jump Relative......................................................................................................6-48
Load...................................................................................................................6-49
Load...................................................................................................................6-50
Load Bit..............................................................................................................6-51
CPIJE
CPIJNE
DA
DA
DEC
DECW
DI
DIV
DJNZ
EI
ENTER
EXIT
IDLE
INC
INCW
IRET
JP
JR
LD
LD
LDB
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Instruction Descriptions(Continued)
Instruction
Mnemonic
Full Register Name
Page
Number
LDC/LDE
LDC/LDE
LDCD/LDED
LDCI/LDEI
LDCPD/LDEPD
LDCPI/LDEPI
LDW
MULT
NEXT
NOP
Load Memory......................................................................................................6-52
Load Memory......................................................................................................6-53
Load Memory and Decrement...............................................................................6-54
Load Memory and Increment ................................................................................6-55
Load Memory with Pre-Decrement ........................................................................6-56
Load Memory with Pre-Increment..........................................................................6-57
Load Word..........................................................................................................6-58
Multiply (Unsigned)..............................................................................................6-59
Next...................................................................................................................6-60
No Operation.......................................................................................................6-61
Logical OR..........................................................................................................6-62
Pop from Stack...................................................................................................6-63
Pop User Stack (Decrementing)............................................................................6-64
Pop User Stack (Incrementing).............................................................................6-65
Push to Stack.....................................................................................................6-66
Push User Stack (Decrementing)..........................................................................6-67
Push User Stack (Incrementing) ...........................................................................6-68
Reset Carry Flag.................................................................................................6-69
Return................................................................................................................6-70
Rotate Left..........................................................................................................6-71
Rotate Left through Carry .....................................................................................6-72
Rotate Right........................................................................................................6-73
Rotate Right through Carry ...................................................................................6-74
Select Bank 0.....................................................................................................6-75
Select Bank 1.....................................................................................................6-76
Subtract with Carry..............................................................................................6-77
Set Carry Flag.....................................................................................................6-78
Shift Right Arithmetic...........................................................................................6-79
Set Register Pointer ............................................................................................6-80
Stop Operation....................................................................................................6-81
Subtract .............................................................................................................6-82
Swap Nibbles......................................................................................................6-83
Test Complement under Mask..............................................................................6-84
Test under Mask .................................................................................................6-85
Wate for Interrupt.................................................................................................6-86
Logical Exclusive OR...........................................................................................6-87
OR
POP
POPUD
POPUI
PUSH
PUSHUD
PUSHUI
RCF
RET
RL
RLC
RR
RRC
SB0
SB1
SBC
SCF
SRA
SRP/SRP0/SRP1
STOP
SUB
SWAP
TCM
TM
WFI
XOR
xxii
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C8-SERIES MICROCONTROLLERS
Samsung's S3C8-series of 8-bit single-chip CMOS microcontrollers offers a fast and efficient CPU, a wide range
of integrated peripherals, and various mask-programmable ROM sizes. The major CPU features are:
— Efficient register-oriented architecture
— Selectable CPU clock sources
— Idle and Stop power-down mode released by interrupt or reset
— Built-in basic timer with watchdog function
A sophisticated interrupt structure recognizes up to eight-interrupt levels. Each level can have one or more
interrupt sources and vectors. Fast interrupt processing (within a minimum of four CPU clocks) can be assigned to
specific interrupt levels.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 MICROCONTROLLER
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 single-chip CMOS microcontrollers are fabricated using the highly advanced CMOS
process technology based on Samsung’s latest CPU architecture.
The S3C84E5 is a microcontroller with a 16K-byte mask-programmable ROM embedded.
The S3C84E9 is a microcontroller with a 32K-byte mask-programmable ROM embedded.
The S3P84E9 is a microcontroller with a 32K-byte OTP ROM embedded.
Using a proven modular design approach, Samsung engineers have successfully developed the
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 by integrating the following peripheral modules with the powerful SAM8 core:
— Five programmable I/O ports (42SDIP: 34pins, 44QFP: 36pins)
— Eleven bit-programmable pins for external interrupts.
— One 8-bit basic timer for oscillation stabilization and watchdog function (system reset).
— Two 8-bit timer/counter and Two 16-bit timer/counter with selectable operating modes.
— One asynchronous UART
— 10-bit 8-channel A/D converter
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 is versatile microcontroller for home appliances and ADC applications, etc. They are
currently available in 44-pin QFP and 42-pin SDIP package.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
FEATURES
CPU
Watch timer
•
SAM88RC CPU core
•
•
Real-time and interval time measurement
Four-frequency outputs for buzzer sound
Memory
A/D Converter
•
•
528-bytes internal register file
16K/32Kbytes internal program memory
(S3C84E5/C84E9:Mask ROM)
(S3P84E9:OTP)
•
•
•
10-bit resolution
Eight-analog input channels
20us conversion speed at 10MHz fADC clock.
Oscillation Sources
Asynchronous UART
•
•
•
Main clock oscillator (Crystal, Ceramic)
CPU clock divider (1/1, 1/2, 1/8, 1/16)
32,768Hz Sub oscillator for watch timer
•
•
•
One Asynchronous UART
Programmable baud rate generator
Supports serial data transmit/receive operations
with 8-bit, 9-bit in UART
Instruction Set
•
•
78 instructions
Built-in RESET Circuit (LVR)
Low-Voltage reset (LVR value: 2.9V)
IDLE and STOP instructions added for power-
down modes
•
Oscillation Frequency
1MHz to 12MHz external crystal oscillator
Instruction Execution Time
333 ns at 12-MHz f (minimum)
•
•
OSC
Operating Temperature Range
Interrupts
• –25°C to + 85°C
•
•
21 interrupt sources with 21 vectors.
8 level, 21 vector interrupt structure
Operating Voltage Range
•
VLVR to 5.5V
I/O Ports
Total 36 bit-programmable pins (44QFP)
Total 34 bit-programmable pins (42SDIP)
•
Package Type
42 pin SDIP, 44 pin QFP
•
Timers and Timer/Counters
•
•
One programmable 8-bit basic timer (BT) for
oscillation stabilization control or watchdog timer
function.
One 8-bit timer/counter (Timer A) with three
operating modes; Interval mode, capture mode
and PWM mode.
•
•
One 8-bit timer (Timer B) with carrier frequency
(or PWM) generator.
Two 16-bit timer/counter (Timer 10,11) with
three operating modes; Interval mode, Capture
mode, and PWM mode.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
BLOCK DIAGRAM
P0.0~P0.7
Port 0
P1.0~P1.5
Port 1
Xin, XTin
Xout, XTout
nRESET
OSC/nRESET
P2.0~P2.7/
INT0~INT7
Port 2
I/O Port and Interrupt Control
8-Bit
Basic Timer
P1.0/TAOUT
P0.7/TACAP
P0.6/TACK
P3.0~P3.7/
ADC0~ADC7
8-Bit
Timer/Counter
A, B
Port 3
Port 4
P4.3/TBPWM
SAM88RC
CPU
P1.2/T1OUT0
P1.1/T1CK0
P0.5/T1CAP0
P0.4/T1OUT1
P0.3/T1CK1
P0.2/T1CAP1
P4.0~P4.5
INT8-INT10
16-Bit
Timer/Counter
10, 11
16K/32K-Byte
ROM
528-Byte
RAM
ADC0~ADC7/
P3.0~P3.7
P1.5/TxD
P1.4/RxD
UART
A/D
AVREF
AVSS
P1.3/BZOUT
Watch Timer
Figure 1-1. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Block Diagram
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PIN ASSIGNMENT
P1.4/RXD
P1.5/TXD
P3.7/ADC7
P3.6/ADC6
P3.5/ADC5
P3.4/ADC4
P3.3/ADC3
P3.2/ADC2
P3.1/ADC1
P3.0/ADC0
AVss
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
XTout/P0.1
XTin/P0.0
TBPWM/P4.3
INT10/P4.2
VDD
S3C84E5
S3C84E9
S3P84E9
VSS
Xout
Xin
Top View
(44-QFP)
TEST
INT9/P4.1
INT8/P4.0
9
10
11
Figure 1-2. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Assignment (44-pin QFP)
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PIN ASSIGNMENT
P1.0/TAOUT
P1.1/T1CK0
P1.2/T1OUT0
P1.3/BZOUT
P1.4/RXD
P1.5/TXD
P3.7/ADC7
P3.6/ADC6
P3.5/ADC5
P3.4/ADC4
P3.3/ADC3
P3.2/ADC2
P3.1/ADC1
P3.0/ADC0
AVss
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
TACAP/P0.7
TACK/P0.6
T1CAP0/P0.5
T1OUT1/P0.4
T1CK1/P0.3
T1CAP1/P0.2
XTout/P0.1
XTin/P0.0
TBPWM/P4.3
INT10/P4.2
VDD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S3C84E5
S3C84E9
S3P84E9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
VSS
Xout
Xin
TEST
Top View
(42-SDIP)
AVref
INT9/P4.1
INT8/P4.0
nRESET
INT0/P2.0
INT1/P2.1
INT2/P2.2
P2.7/INT7
P2.6/INT6
P2.5/INT5
P2.4/INT4
P2.3/INT3
Figure 1-3. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Assignment (42-pin SDIP)
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Table 1-1. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Descriptions
Pin
Name
Pin
Type
Pin
Description
Circuit
Type
Pin
Number
Share
Pins
P0.0–P0.7
I/O Bit programmable port; input or output mode
selected by software; input or push-pull output.
Software assignable pull-up resistor.
F
D
1-2
38-43
(1-8)
XTIN, XTOUT
TACAP
TACK
Alternately, can be used as I/O for Timer A,
Timer 1(0,1). P0.0 and P0.1 can alternately be
used for subsystem oscillator in/out mode
selected by software
T1CAP0
T1OUT1
T1CK1
T1CAP1
P1.0–P1.5
P2.0–P2.7
I/O Bit programmable port; input or output mode
selected by software; input or push-pull output.
Software assignable pull-up resistor. Alternatively
can be used as Timer A, Timer 1(0), UART,
Watch Timer Buzzer output.
D
32-37
(37-42)
TAOUT
T1CK0
T1OUT0
TXD
RXD
I/O Bit programmable port; input or output mode
selected by software; input or push-pull output.
Software assignable pull-up.
D-1
13-20
(19-26)
INT0–INT7
Alternately, can be used as inputs for external
interrupts INT0–INT7. (with noise filters and
interrupt controller)
P3.0–P3.7
P4.0–P4.5
I/O Bit programmable port; input or output mode
selected by software; input or push-pull output.
Software assignable pull-up.
E
24-31
(19-26)
ADC0–ADC7
Alternately, can be used as analog inputs for A/D
converter modules.
I/O Bit programmable port; input or output mode
selected by software; input or push-pull output.
Software assignable pull-up. Alternatively can be
used as Timer B, inputs for external interrupts
INT8–INT10. (with noise filters and interrupt
controller)
D-1
D
10,11
3,4
44,21
INT8–INT10
TBPWM
(16-17)
(9-10)
NOTE: Pin numbers shown in parentheses "( )" are for the 42-pin SDIP package.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Table 1-1. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Pin Descriptions (Continued)
Pin
Name
Pin
Type
Pin
Description
Circuit
Type
Pin
Number
Share
Pins
INT0–INT10
I
Input pins for external interrupt.
Alternatively used as general-purpose digital
input/output port 2,4.
D-1
E
13-20, 4 P2.0–P2.7
10-11
(19-26)
P4.0–P4.2
(10,16-17)
ADC0–ADC7
I
Analog input pins for A/D converter module.
Alternatively used as general-purpose digital
input/output port 3.
24-31
P3.0–P3.7
(29-36)
AVREF, AVSS
RxD
–
I
A/D converter reference voltage and ground
–
D
D
22, 23
(27, 28)
–
Serial data RxD pin for receive input and
transmit output (mode 0)
33
(38)
P1.4
P1.5
TxD
O
Serial data TxD pin for transmit output and
shift clock output (mode 0)
32
(37)
TACK
I
I
External clock input pins for timer A
Capture input pins for timer A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
39(2)
38(1)
P0.6
P0.7
P1.0
P1.3
P4.3
P1.1
P0.5
P1.2
TACAP
TAOUT
BUZ
O
O
O
I
Pulse width modulation output pins for timer A
Buzzer output pin
37(42)
34(39)
3(9)
TBPWM
T1CK0
T1CAP0
T1OUT0
Carrier frequency output pins for timer B
External clock input pins for timer 1(0)
Capture input pins for timer 1(0)
36(41)
40(3)
I
O
Timer 1(0) 16-bit PWM mode output or
counter match toggle output pins
35(40)
T1CK1
I
I
External clock input pins for timer 1(1)
Capture input pins for timer 1(1)
D
D
D
42(3)
43(5)
41(4)
P0.3
P0.2
P0.4
T1CAP1
T1OUT1
O
Timer 1(1) 16-bit PWM mode output or
counter match toggle output pins
nRESET
TEST
I
I
System reset pin
B
–
–
12(18)
9(15)
–
–
–
Pull-down resistor connected internally
Power input pins
VDD, VSS
–
5,6
(11,12)
XTIN, XTOUT
I,O
I,O
Subsystem oscillator pins
Main oscillator pins
–
–
1,2
(7,8)
P0.0, P0.1
–
Xin, Xout
7,8
(13,14)
NOTE: Pin numbers shown in parentheses "( )" are for the 42-pin SDIP package.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PIN CIRCUITS
VDD
Pull-Up
Resistor
In
Schmitt Trigger
Figure 1-4. Pin Circuit Type B (nRESET)
VDD
P-Channel
Data
Out
N-Channel
Output
Disable
Figure 1-5. Pin Circuit Type C
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
Data
Pin Circuit
Type C
I/O
Output
Disable
Figure 1-6. Pin Circuit Type D (P0.2-P0.7, P1, P4.3–P4.5)
VDD
VDD
Pull-up
Data
Enable
Pin Circuit
Type C
I/O
Output
Disable
Noise
Filter
Ext.INT
Input
Normal
Figure 1-7. Pin Circuit Type D-1 (P2, and P4.0–P4.2)
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
VDD
Pull-up Resistor
(Typical Value: 47k
Ω)
Pull-up
Enable
VDD
Data
In/Out
Output
DIsable
Normal
Input
Analog
Input
Figure 1-8. Pin Circuit Type E (P3)
VDD
Pull-up
enable
VDD
P-CH
N-CH
Output Data
I/O
Output Disable
(Input Mode)
Digital Input
Alternative I/O Enable
XTin, XTout Oscillation circuit
Figure 1-9. Pin Circuit Type F (P0.0, P0.1)
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
2
ADDRESS SPACES
OVERVIEW
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller has two types of address space:
— Internal program memory (ROM)
— Internal register file (RAM)
A 16-bit address bus supports program memory operations. A separate 8-bit register bus carries addresses and data
between the CPU and the register file.
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 has an internal 16/32-Kbyte mask-programmable ROM / 32-Kbyte OTP ROM and 528-
byte RAM.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
Program memory (ROM) stores program codes or table data. The S3C84E5/84E9 has 16Kbytes and 32Kbytes of
internal mask programmable program memory. The program memory address range is therefore 0H–3FFFH and 0H-
7FFFH (see Figure 2-1).
The first 256 bytes of the ROM (0H-0FFH) are reserved for interrupt vector addresses. Unused locations in this
address range can be used as normal program memory. If you use the vector address area to store a program code,
be careful not to overwrite the vector addresses stored in these locations.
The ROM address at which a program execution starts after a reset is 0100H.
(HEX)
(Decimal)
32,767
32-KByte
16-KByte
7FFFH (S3C84E9/P84E9)
(Decimal)
16,383
(HEX)
3FFFH (S3C84E5)
255
0FFH
0H
Interrupt
Vector Area
0
Figure 2-1. Program Memory Address Space
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER ARCHITECTURE
In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 implementation, the upper 64-byte area of register files is expanded two 64-byte
areas, called set 1 and set 2. The upper 32-byte area of set 1 is further expanded two 32-byte register banks (bank 0
and bank 1), and the lower 32-byte area is a single 32-byte common area. set 2 is logically expanded 2 separately
addressable register pages, page 0–page 1.
In case of S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 the total number of addressable 8-bit registers is 590. Of these 590 registers, 16
bytes are for CPU and system control registers, 46 bytes are for peripheral control and data registers, 16 bytes are
used as a shared working registers, and 512 registers are for general-purpose use.
You can always address set 1 register location, regardless of which of the 2 register pages is currently selected. The
set 1 locations, however, can only be addressed using direct addressing modes.
The extension of register space into separately addressable areas (sets, banks, and pages) is supported by various
addressing mode restrictions, the select bank instructions, SB0 and SB1, and the register page pointer (PP).
Specific register types and the area (in bytes) that they occupy in the register file are summarized in Table 2–1.
Table 2-1. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Register Type Summary
Register Type
Number of Bytes
General-purpose registers (including 16-byte common
working register area, expanded 2 separately addressable
register pages (1Page occupies 192-byte prime register
area and the 64-byte set 2 area)
528
CPU and system control registers
Mapped clock, peripheral, I/O control, and data registers
16
46
Total Addressable Bytes
590
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Set1
Page 1
FFH
FFH
E0H
Bank 1
Page 0
FFH
Bank 0
32
Bytes
Set 2
System and
Peripheral Control Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
General-Purpose
Data Registers
E0H
(Indirect Register, Indexed
64
Bytes
DFH
Mode, and Stack Operations)
System and
Peripheral Control Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
256
Bytes
D0H
CFH
C0H
BFH
General Purpose Register
(Register Addressing Mode)
C0H
Prime
Data Registers
192
Bytes
(All Addressing Modes)
00H
Figure 2-2. Internal Register File Organization
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER PAGE POINTER (PP)
The S3C8-series architecture supports the logical expansion of the physical 512-byte internal register file (using an
8-bit data bus) into as many as 2 separately addressable register pages. Page addressing is controlled by the
register page pointer (PP, DFH). In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller, a paged register file expansion is
implemented for data registers, and the register page pointer must be changed to address other pages.
After a reset, the page pointer's source value (lower nibble) and the destination value (upper nibble) are always
"0000", automatically selecting page 0 as the source and destination page for register addressing.
Register Page Pointer (PP)
DFH ,Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Destination register page selection bits:
Source register page selection bits:
0000
0001
Destination: Page 0
Destination: Page 1
0000
0001
Source: Page 0
Source: Page 1
A hardware reset operation writes the 4-bit destination and source values shown
above to the register page pointer. These values should be modified to other
pages.
NOTE:
Figure 2-3. Register Page Pointer (PP)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Page Pointer for RAM clear (Page 0, Page 1)
LD
PP,#00H
#0C0H
;
;
Destination ¬ 0, Source ¬ 0
SRP
LD
R0,#0FFH
@R0
Page 0 RAM clear starts
RAMCL0:
CLR
DJNZ
CLR
LD
R0,RAMCL0
@R0
;
;
;
R0 = 00H
PP,#10H
R0,#0FFH
@R0
Destination ¬ 1, Source ¬ 0
Page 1 RAM clear starts
LD
RAMCL1:
CLR
DJNZ
CLR
R0,RAMCL1
@R0
;
R0 = 00H
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
REGISTER SET 1
The term set 1 refers to the upper 64 bytes of the register file, locations C0H–FFH.
The upper 32-byte area of this 64-byte space (E0H–FFH) is expanded two 32-byte register banks, bank 0 and bank
1. The set register bank instructions, SB0 or SB1, are used to address one bank or the other. A hardware reset
operation always selects bank 0 addressing.
The upper two 32-byte areas (bank 0 and bank 1) of set 1 (E0H–FFH) contains 64 mapped system and peripheral
control registers. The lower 32-byte area contains 16 system registers (D0H–DFH) and a 16-byte common working
register area (C0H–CFH). You can use the common working register area as a “scratch” area for data operations
being performed in other areas of the register file.
Registers in set 1 locations are directly accessible at all times using Register addressing mode. The 16-byte
working register area can only be accessed using working register addressing (For more information about working
register addressing, please refer to Chapter 3, “Addressing Modes.”)
REGISTER SET 2
The same 64-byte physical space that is used for set 1 locations C0H–FFH is logically duplicated to add another 64
bytes of register space. This expanded area of the register file is called set 2. For S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9, the set 2
address range (C0H–FFH) is accessible on pages 0-1.
The logical division of set 1 and set 2 is maintained by means of addressing mode restrictions. You can use only
Register addressing mode to access set 1 locations. In order to access registers in set 2, you must use Register
Indirect addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode.
The set 2 register area is commonly used for stack operations.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PRIME REGISTER SPACE
The lower 192 bytes (00H–BFH) of the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9's two 256-byte register pages is called prime
register area. Prime registers can be accessed using any of the seven addressing modes (see Chapter 3,
"Addressing Modes.")
The prime register area on page 0 is immediately addressable following a reset. In order to address prime registers
on pages 0, or 1 you must set the register page pointer (PP) to the appropriate source and destination values.
Page 1
Page 0
Set 1
Bank 0
Bank 1
FFH
FFH
F0H
E0H
D0H
C0H
Set 2
C0H
BFH
Page 0
CPU and system control
General-purpose
Prime
Space
Peripheral and I/O
00H
Figure 2-4. Set 1, Set 2, Prime Area Register
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
WORKING REGISTERS
ADDRESS SPACES
Instructions can access specific 8-bit registers or 16-bit register pairs using either 4-bit or 8-bit address fields. When
4-bit working register addressing is used, the 256-byte register file can be seen by the programmer as one that
consists of 32 8-byte register groups or "slices." Each slice comprises of eight 8-bit registers.
Using the two 8-bit register pointers, RP1 and RP0, two working register slices can be selected at any one time to
form a 16-byte working register block. Using the register pointers, you can move this 16-byte register block
anywhere in the addressable register file, except for the set 2 area.
The terms slice and block are used in this manual to help you visualize the size and relative locations of selected
working register spaces:
— One working register slice is 8 bytes (eight 8-bit working registers, R0–R7 or R8–R15)
— One working register block is 16 bytes (sixteen 8-bit working registers, R0–R15)
All the registers in an 8-byte working register slice have the same binary value for their five most significant address
bits. This makes it possible for each register pointer to point to one of the 24 slices in the register file other than set
2. The base addresses for the two selected 8-byte register slices are contained in register pointers RP0 and RP1.
After a reset, RP0 and RP1 always point to the 16-byte common area in set 1 (C0H–CFH).
FFH
Slice 32
F8H
F7H
1 1 1 1 1 X X X
Slice 31
F0H
Set 1
Only
RP1 (Registers R8-R15)
Each register pointer points to
one 8-byte slice of the register
space, selecting a total 16-
byte working register block.
CFH
C0H
~
~
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP0 (Registers R0-R7)
10H
FH
Slice 2
Slice 1
8H
7H
0H
Figure 2-5. 8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices)
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
USING THE REGISTER POINTERS
Register pointers RP0 and RP1, mapped to addresses D6H and D7H in set 1, are used to select two movable 8-byte
working register slices in the register file. After a reset, RP# point to the working register common area: RP0 points
to addresses C0H–C7H, and RP1 points to addresses C8H–CFH.
To change a register pointer value, you load a new value to RP0 and or RP1 using an SRP or LD instruction.
(see Figures 2-6 and 2-7).
With working register addressing, you can only access those two 8-bit slices of the register file that are currently
pointed to by RP0 and RP1. You cannot, however, use the register pointers to select a working register space in set
2, C0H–FFH, because these locations can be accessed only using the Indirect Register or Indexed addressing
modes.
The selected 16-byte working register block usually consists of two contiguous 8-byte slices. As a general
programming guideline, it is recommended that RP0 point to the "lower" slice and RP1 point to the "upper" slice
(see Figure 2-6). ). In some cases, it may be necessary to define working register areas in different (non-contiguous)
areas of the register file. In Figure 2-7, RP0 points to the "upper" slice and RP1 to the "lower" slice.
Because a register pointer can point to either of the two 8-byte slices in the working register block, you can flexibly
define the working register area to support program requirements.
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Setting the Register Pointers
SRP
SRP1
SRP0
CLR
LD
#70H
;
;
;
;
;
RP0 ¬ 70H, RP1 ¬ 78H
#48H
RP0 ¬ no change, RP1 ¬ 48H,
RP0 ¬ 0A0H, RP1 ¬ no change
RP0 ¬ 00H, RP1 ¬ no change
RP0 ¬ no change, RP1 ¬ 0F8H
#0A0H
RP0
RP1,#0F8H
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
0 0 0 0 1 X X X
RP1
FH (R15)
8-Byte Slice
8-Byte Slice
16-Byte Contiguous
Working Register
block
8H
7H
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP0
0H (R0)
Figure 2-6. Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
F7H (R7)
F0H (R0)
8-Byte Slice
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
16-byte Non-
contiguous working
register block
1 1 1 1 0 X X X
RP0
7H (R15)
0H (R8)
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP1
8-Byte Slice
Figure 2-7. Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers
Calculate the sum of registers 80H–85H using the register pointer. The register addresses from 80H through 85H
contain the values 10H, 11H, 12H, 13H, 14H, and 15 H, respectively:
SRP0
ADD
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
#80H
;
;
;
;
;
;
RP0 ¬ 80H
R0,R1
R0,R2
R0,R3
R0,R4
R0,R5
R0 ¬ R0 + R1
R0 ¬ R0 + R2 + C
R0 ¬ R0 + R3 + C
R0 ¬ R0 + R4 + C
R0 ¬ R0 + R5 + C
The sum of these six registers, 6FH, is located in the register R0 (80H). The instruction string used in this example
takes 12 bytes of instruction code and its execution time is 36 cycles. If the register pointer is not used to calculate
the sum of these registers, the following instruction sequence would have to be used:
ADD
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
80H,81H
80H,82H
80H,83H
80H,84H
80H,85H
;
;
;
;
;
80H ¬ (80H) + (81H)
80H ¬ (80H) + (82H) + C
80H ¬ (80H) + (83H) + C
80H ¬ (80H) + (84H) + C
80H ¬ (80H) + (85H) + C
Now, the sum of the six registers is also located in register 80H. However, this instruction string takes 15 bytes of
instruction code rather than 12 bytes, and its execution time is 50 cycles rather than 36 cycles.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
REGISTER ADDRESSING
The S3C8-series register architecture provides an efficient method of working register addressing that takes full
advantage of shorter instruction formats to reduce execution time.
With Register (R) addressing mode, in which the operand value is the content of a specific register or register pair,
you can access any location in the register file except for set 2. With working register addressing, you use a register
pointer to specify an 8-byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space.
Registers are addressed either as a single 8-bit register or as a paired 16-bit register space. In a 16-bit register pair,
the address of the first 8-bit register is always an even number and the address of the next register is always an odd
number. The most significant byte of the 16-bit data is always stored in the even-numbered register, and the least
significant byte is always stored in the next (+1) odd-numbered register.
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing as it uses a register pointer to identify a specific 8-byte
working register space in the internal register file and a specific 8-bit register within that space.
MSB
Rn
LSB
n = Even address
Rn+1
Figure 2-8. 16-Bit Register Pair
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
Special-Purpose Registers
Bank 1 Bank 0
General-Purpose Register
FFH
FFH
Control
Registers
Set 2
E0H
D0H
System
Registers
CFH
C0H
BFH
C0H
RP1
RP0
Register
Pointers
Each register pointer (RP) can independently point
to one of the 24 8-byte "slices" of the register file
(other than set 2). After a reset, RP0 points to
locations C0H-C7H and RP1 to locations C8H-CFH
(that is, to the common working register area).
Prime
Registers
NOTE:
In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller,
pages 0-1 are implemented. Pages 0-1
contain all of the addressable registers
in the internal register file.
00H
Page 0-1
Page 0-1
Register Addressing Only
All
Indirect Register,
Indexed Addressing
Modes
Addressing
Modes
Can be pointed by Register Pointer
Figure 2-9. Register File Addressing
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
COMMON WORKING REGISTER AREA (C0H–CFH)
After a reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 automatically select two 8-byte register slices in set 1, locations C0H–
CFH, as the active 16-byte working register block:
RP0 ® C0H–C7H
RP1 ® C8H–CFH
This 16-byte address range is called common area. That is, locations in this area can be used as working registers
by operations that address any location on any page in the register file. Typically, these working registers serve as
temporary buffers for data operations between different pages.
FFH
FFH
Page 1
Page 0
Set 1
FFH
F0H
E0H
D0H
C0H
Set 2
C0H
BFH
Page 0
Following a hardware reset, register
pointers RP0 and RP1 point to the
common working register area,
locations C0H-CFH.
~
~
~
Prime
Space
RP0 = 1 1 0 0
RP1 = 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
00H
Figure 2-10. Common Working Register Area
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Addressing the Common Working Register Area
As the following examples show, you should access working registers in the common area, locations C0H–CFH,
using working register addressing mode only.
Examples 1:
1. LD
0C2H,40H
;
Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
LD
#0C0H
R2,40H
;
;
R2 (C2H) ¬ the value in location 40H
Example 2:
ADD
0C3H,#45H
Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
ADD
#0C0H
R3,#45H
;
R3 (C3H) ¬ R3 + 45H
4-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING
Each register pointer defines a movable 8-byte slice of working register space. The address information stored in a
register pointer serves as an addressing "window" that makes it possible for instructions to access working registers
very efficiently using short 4-bit addresses. When an instruction addresses a location in the selected working
register area, the address bits are concatenated in the following way to form a complete 8-bit address:
— The high-order bit of the 4-bit address selects one of the register pointers ("0" selects RP0, "1" selects RP1).
— The five high-order bits in the register pointer select an 8-byte slice of the register space.
— The three low-order bits of the 4-bit address select one of the eight registers in the slice.
As shown in Figure 2-11, the result of this operation is that the five high-order bits from the register pointer are
concatenated with the three low-order bits from the instruction address to form the complete address. As long as the
address stored in the register pointer remains unchanged, the three bits from the address will always point to an
address in the same 8-byte register slice.
Figure 2-12 shows a typical example of 4-bit working register addressing. The high-order bit of the instruction
"INC R6" is "0", which selects RP0. The five high-order bits stored in RP0 (01110B) are concatenated with the three
low-order bits of the instruction's 4-bit address (110B) to produce the register address 76H (01110110B).
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
OPCODE
4-bit address
provides three
low-order bits
Register pointer
provides five
high-order bits
Together they create an
8-bit register address
Figure 2-11. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing
RP0
0 1 1 1 0
RP1
0 0 0
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0
Selects RP0
R6
OPCODE
1 1 1 0
Register
address
(76H)
Instruction
'INC R6'
0 1 1 1 0
1 1 0
0 1 1 0
Figure 2-12. 4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
8-BIT WORKING REGISTER ADDRESSING
You can also use 8-bit working register addressing to access registers in a selected working register area. To
initiate 8-bit working register addressing, the upper four bits of the instruction address must contain the value
"1100B." This 4-bit value (1100B) indicates that the remaining four bits have the same effect as 4-bit working register
addressing.
As shown in Figure 2-13, the lower nibble of the 8-bit address is concatenated in much the same way as for 4-bit
addressing. Bit 3 selects either RP0 or RP1, which then supplies the five high-order bits of the final address. The
three low-order bits of the complete address are provided by the original instruction.
Figure 2-14 shows an example of 8-bit working register addressing. The four high-order bits of the instruction address
(1100B) specify 8-bit working register addressing. Bit 3 ("1") selects RP1 and the five high-order bits in RP1
(10101B) become the five high-order bits of the register address. The three low-order bits of the register address
(011) are provided by the three low-order bits of the 8-bit instruction address. The five-address bits from RP1 and the
three address bits from the instruction are concatenated to form the complete register address, 0ABH (10101011B).
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
These address
bits indicate 8-bit
working register
addressing
8-bit logical
address
1
1
0
0
Register pointer
provides five
Three low-order bits
high-order bits
8-bit physical address
Figure 2-13. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RP0
0 1 1 0 0
RP1
1 0 1 0 1
0 0 0
0 0 0
Selects RP1
R11
8-bit address
Register
form instruction
'LD R11, R2'
1 1 0 0
1
0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1
address
(0ABH)
Specifies working
register addressing
Figure 2-14. 8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESS SPACES
SYSTEM AND USER STACK
The S3C8-series microcontrollers use the system stack for data storage, subroutine calls and returns. The PUSH
and POP instructions are used to control system stack operations. The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E architecture
supports stack operations in the internal register file.
Stack Operations
Return addresses for procedure calls, interrupts, and data are stored on the stack. The contents of the PC are saved
to stack by a CALL instruction and restored by the RET instruction. When an interrupt occurs, the contents of the
PC and the FLAGS register are pushed to the stack. The IRET instruction then pops these values back to their
original locations. The stack address value is always decreased by one before a push operation and increased by
one after a pop operation. The stack pointer (SP) always points to the stack frame stored on the top of the stack, as
shown in Figure 2-15.
High Address
PCL
PCL
PCH
Top of
PCH
stack
Top of
stack
Flags
Stack contents
after a call
Stack contents
after an
instruction
interrupt
Low Address
Figure 2-15. Stack Operations
User-Defined Stacks
You can freely define stacks in the internal register file as data storage locations. The instructions PUSHUI,
PUSHUD, POPUI, and POPUD support user-defined stack operations.
Stack Pointers (SPL, SPH)
Register locations D8H and D9H contain the 16-bit stack pointer (SP) that is used for system stack operations. The
most significant byte of the SP address, SP15–SP8, is stored in the SPH register (D8H), and the least significant
byte, SP7–SP0, is stored in the SPL register (D9H). After a reset, the SP value is undetermined.
Because only internal memory space is implemented in the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E, the SPL must be initialized to
an 8-bit value in the range 00H–FFH. The SPH register is not needed and can be used as a general-purpose register,
if necessary.
When the SPL register contains the only stack pointer value (that is, when it points to a system stack in the register
file), you can use the SPH register as a general-purpose data register. However, if an overflow or underflow condition
occurs as a result of increasing or decreasing the stack address value in the SPL register during normal stack
operations, the value in the SPL register will overflow (or underflow) to the SPH register, overwriting any other data
that is currently stored there. To avoid overwriting data in the SPH register, you can initialize the SPL value to "FFH"
instead of "00H".
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESS SPACES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP
The following example shows you how to perform stack operations in the internal register file using PUSH and POP
instructions:
LD
SPL,#0FFH
;
;
;
SPL ¬ FFH
(Normally, the SPL is set to 0FFH by the initialization
routine)
•
•
•
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
PP
RP0
RP1
R3
•
;
;
;
;
Stack address 0FEH ¬ PP
Stack address 0FDH ¬ RP0
Stack address 0FCH ¬ RP1
Stack address 0FBH ¬ R3
•
•
POP
POP
POP
POP
R3
RP1
RP0
PP
;
;
;
;
R3 ¬ Stack address 0FBH
RP1 ¬ Stack address 0FCH
RP0 ¬ Stack address 0FDH
PP ¬ Stack address 0FEH
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
3
ADDRESSING MODES
OVERVIEW
Instructions that are stored in program memory are fetched for execution using the program counter. Instructions
indicate the operation to be performed and the data to be operated on. Addressing mode is the method used to
determine the location of the data operand. The operands specified in SAM88RC instructions may be condition
codes, immediate data, or a location in the register file, program memory, or data memory.
The S3C8-series instruction set supports seven explicit addressing modes. Not all of these addressing modes are
available for each instruction. The seven addressing modes and their symbols are:
— Register (R)
— Indirect Register (IR)
— Indexed (X)
— Direct Address (DA)
— Indirect Address (IA)
— Relative Address (RA)
— Immediate (IM)
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (R)
In Register addressing mode (R), the operand value is the content of a specified register or register pair
(see Figure 3-1).
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing in that it uses a register pointer to specify an 8-byte
working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space (see Figure 3-2).
Program Memory
Register File
OPERAND
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
Point to One
Register in Register
File
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Value used in
Instruction Execution
Sample Instruction:
DEC
CNTR
;
Where CNTR is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-1. Register Addressing
Register File
MSB Point to
RP0 ot RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start
Program Memory
of working
register
block
4-bit
Working Register
3 LSBs
dst
src
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
OPERAND
Two-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Sample Instruction:
ADD R1, R2
;
Where R1 and R2 are registers in the currently
selected working register area.
Figure 3-2. Working Register Addressing
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (IR)
In Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode, the content of the specified register or register pair is the address of the
operand. Depending on the instruction used, the actual address may point to a register in the register file, to program
memory (ROM), or to an external memory space (see Figures 3-3 through 3-6).
You can use any 8-bit register to indirectly address another register. Any 16-bit register pair can be used to indirectly
address another memory location. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in set 1 using
the Indirect Register addressing mode.
Program Memory
Register File
ADDRESS
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
Point to One
Register in Register
File
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Address of Operand
used by Instruction
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction Execution
Sample Instruction:
RL
@SHIFT
;
Where SHIFT is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-3. Indirect Register Addressing to Register File
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
Program Memory
Example
REGISTER
PAIR
dst
Instruction
References
Program
Points to
Register Pair
OPCODE
16-Bit
Memory
Address
Points to
Program
Memory
Program Memory
OPERAND
Sample Instructions:
Value used in
Instruction
CALL
JP
@RR2
@RR2
Figure 3-4. Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start fo
working register
block
Program Memory
~
~
~
~
4-bit
Working
Register
Address
3 LSBs
dst
src
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
ADDRESS
OPERAND
OPCODE
Sample Instruction:
OR R3, @R6
Value used in
Instruction
Figure 3-5. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INDIRECT REGISTER ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
RP0 or RP1
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
Program Memory
4-bit Working
Register Address
dst
src
Register
Pair
Next 2-bit Point
to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
OPCODE
Example Instruction
References either
Program Memory or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
points to
program
memory
or data
memory
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
LSB Selects
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
Sample Instructions:
LCD
LDE
LDE
R5,@RR6
R3,@RR14
@RR4, R8
; Program memory access
; External data memory access
; External data memory access
Figure 3-6. Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (X)
Indexed (X) addressing mode adds an offset value to a base address during instruction execution in order to calculate
the effective operand address (see Figure 3-7). You can use Indexed addressing mode to access locations in the
internal register file or in external memory. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H–FFH in
set 1 using indexed addressing mode.
In short offset Indexed addressing mode, the 8-bit displacement is treated as a signed integer in the range –128 to
+127. This applies to external memory accesses only (see Figure 3-8.)
For register file addressing, an 8-bit base address provided by the instruction is added to an 8-bit offset contained in
a working register. For external memory accesses, the base address is stored in the working register pair
designated in the instruction. The 8-bit or 16-bit offset given in the instruction is then added to that base address (see
Figure 3-9).
The only instruction that supports indexed addressing mode for the internal register file is the Load instruction (LD).
The LDC and LDE instructions support indexed addressing mode for internal program memory and for external data
memory, when implemented.
Register File
RP0 or RP1
~
~
~
~
Selected RP
points to
start of
working
register
block
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
+
Program Memory
Base Address
3 LSBs
Two-Operand
Instruction
Example
dst/src
x
INDEX
Point to One of the
Woking Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
Sample Instruction:
LD R0, #BASE[R1]
;
Where BASE is an 8-bit immediate value
Figure 3-7. Indexed Addressing to Register File
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
RP0 or RP1
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
~
~
Program Memory
OFFSET
NEXT 2 Bits
4-bit Working
Register Address
dst/src
x
Register
Pair
Point to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
OPCODE
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
Program Memory
or
LSB Selects
Data Memory
+
16-Bits
8-Bits
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
16-Bits
Sample Instructions:
LDC
LDE
R4, #04H[RR2]
R4,#04H[RR2]
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 04H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-8. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
INDEXED ADDRESSING MODE (Continued)
Register File
RP0 or RP1
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
Program Memory
~
~
OFFSET
OFFSET
NEXT 2 Bits
4-bit Working
Register Address
dst/src
src
Register
Pair
Point to Working
Register Pair
OPCODE
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
Program Memory
or
LSB Selects
Data Memory
+
16-Bits
16-Bits
Value used in
Instruction
OPERAND
16-Bits
Sample Instructions:
LDC
LDE
R4, #1000H[RR2]
R4,#1000H[RR2]
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 1000H
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-9. Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (DA)
In Direct Address (DA) mode, the instruction provides the operand's 16-bit memory address. Jump (JP) and Call
(CALL) instructions use this addressing mode to specify the 16-bit destination address that is loaded into the PC
whenever a JP or CALL instruction is executed.
The LDC and LDE instructions can use Direct Address mode to specify the source or destination address for Load
operations to program memory (LDC) or to external data memory (LDE), if implemented.
Program or
Data Memory
Memory
Address
Used
Program Memory
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
dst/src
"0" or "1"
LSB Selects Program
Memory or Data Memory:
"0" = Program Memory
"1" = Data Memory
OPCODE
Sample Instructions:
LDC
LDE
R5,1234H ; The values in the program address (1234H)
are loaded into register R5.
R5,1234H ; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Figure 3-10. Direct Addressing for Load Instructions
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
DIRECT ADDRESS MODE (Continued)
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Memory
Address
Used
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
OPCODE
Sample Instructions:
JP
CALL
C,JOB1
DISPLAY
;
;
Where JOB1 is a 16-bit immediate address
Where DISPLAY is a 16-bit immediate address
Figure 3-11. Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INDIRECT ADDRESS MODE (IA)
In Indirect Address (IA) mode, the instruction specifies an address located in the lowest 256 bytes of the program
memory. The selected pair of memory locations contains the actual address of the next instruction to be executed.
Only the CALL instruction can use the Indirect Address mode.
Because the Indirect Address mode assumes that the operand is located in the lowest 256 bytes of program
memory, only an 8-bit address is supplied in the instruction; the upper bytes of the destination address are assumed
to be all zeros.
Program Memory
Next Instruction
LSB Must be Zero
dst
Current
OPCODE
Instruction
Lower Address Byte
Upper Address Byte
Program Memory
Locations 0-255
Sample Instruction:
CALL #40H
; The 16-bit value in program memory addresses 40H
and 41H is the subroutine start address.
Figure 3-12. Indirect Addressing
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADDRESSING MODES
RELATIVE ADDRESS MODE (RA)
In Relative Address (RA) mode, a twos-complement signed displacement between – 128 and + 127 is specified in
the instruction. The displacement value is then added to the current PC value. The result is the address of the next
instruction to be executed. Before this addition occurs, the PC contains the address of the instruction immediately
following the current instruction.
Several program control instructions use the Relative Address mode to perform conditional jumps. The instructions
that support RA addressing are BTJRF, BTJRT, DJNZ, CPIJE, CPIJNE, and JR.
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Program Memory
Address Used
Current
PC Value
+
Displacement
OPCODE
Current Instruction
Signed
Displacement Value
Sample Instructions:
JR
ULT,$+OFFSET
;
Where OFFSET is a value in the range +127 to -128
Figure 3-13. Relative Addressing
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDRESSING MODES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
IMMEDIATE MODE (IM)
In Immediate (IM) addressing mode, the operand value used in the instruction is the value supplied in the operand
field itself. The operand may be one byte or one word in length, depending on the instruction used. Immediate
addressing mode is useful for loading constant values into registers.
Program Memory
OPERAND
OPCODE
(The Operand value is in the instruction)
Sample Instruction:
LD
R0,#0AAH
Figure 3-14. Immediate Addressing
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
4
CONTROL REGISTERS
OVERVIEW
Control register descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order according to register mnemonic. More detailed
information about control registers is presented in the context of the specific peripheral hardware descriptions in Part
II of this manual.
The locations and read/write characteristics of all mapped registers in the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 register file are
listed in Table 4-1. The hardware Reset value for each mapped register is described in Chapter 8, RESET and
Power-Down."
Table 4-1. Set 1 Registers
Register Name
Timer B control register
Mnemonic
TBCON
TBDATAH
TBDATAL
BTCON
CLKCON
FLAGS
RP0
Decimal
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
Hex
D0H
D1H
D2H
D3H
D4H
D5H
D6H
D7H
D8H
D9H
DAH
DBH
DCH
DDH
DEH
DFH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Timer B data register (High Byte)
Timer B data register (Low Byte)
Basic timer control register
Clock control register
System flags register
Register pointer 0
Register pointer 1
RP1
Stack pointer (High Byte)
Stack pointer (Low Byte)
Instruction pointer (High Byte)
Instruction pointer (Low Byte)
Interrupt request register
Interrupt mask register
System mode register
SPH
SPL
IPH
IPL
IRQ
IMR
R/W
R/W
R/W
SYM
Register page pointer
PP
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 4-2. Set 1, Bank 0 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
P0
Decimal
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
E5H
E6H
E7H
E8H
E9H
EAH
EBH
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
F0H
F1H
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F6H
F7H
F8H
F9H
FAH
FBH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Port 0 data register
Port 1 data register
P1
Port 2 data register
P2
Port 3 data register
P3
Port 4 data register
P4
STOP control register
STPCON
P0CONH
P0CONL
P1CONH
P1CONL
P2CONH
P2CONL
P2INT
Port 0 control register (High Byte)
Port 0 control register (Low Byte)
Port 1 control register (High Byte)
Port 1 control register (Low Byte)
Port 2 control register (High Byte)
Port 2 control register (Low Byte)
Port 2 interrupt control register
Port 2 interrupt/pending register
Port 3 control register (High Byte)
Port 3 control register (Low Byte)
Port 4 control register (High Byte)
Port 4 control register (Low Byte)
Port 4 interrupt control register
Port 4 interrupt/pending register
UART pending register
P2INTPND
P3CONH
P3CONL
P4CONH
P4CONL
P4INT
P4INTPND
UARTPND
UDATA
UART data register
UART control register
UARTCON
ADCON
ADDATAH
ADDATAL
WTCON
OSCCON
A/D converter control register
A/D converter data register (High Byte)
A/D converter data register (Low Byte)
Watch timer control register
Oscillator control register
R
R/W
R/W
Location FCH is factory use only
Basic timer counter register
Location FEH is not mapped
Interrupt priority register
BTCNT
IPR
253
255
FDH
FFH
R
R/W
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
Table 4-3. Set 1, Bank 1 Registers
Register Name
Mnemonic
TINTPND
TACON
Decimal
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
E5H
E6H
E7H
E8H
E9H
EAH
EBH
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Timer A, Timer 1 interrupt pending register
Timer A control register
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
Timer A data register
TADATA
Timer A counter register
TACNT
Timer 1(0) data register (High Byte)
Timer 1(0) data register (Low Byte)
Timer 1(1) data register (High Byte)
Timer 1(1) data register (Low Byte)
Timer 1(0) control register
T1DATAH0
T1DATAL0
T1DATAH1
T1DATAL1
T1CON0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Timer 1(1) control register
T1CON1
Timer 1(0) counter register (High Byte)
Timer 1(0) counter register (Low Byte)
Timer 1(1) counter register (High Byte)
Timer 1(1) counter register (Low Byte)
UART baud rate data register (High Byte)
UART baud rate data register (Low Byte)
Location F0H – FFH are not mapped
T1CNTH0
T1CNTL0
T1CNTH1
T1CNTL1
BRDATAH
BRDATAL
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Name of individual
bit or related bits
Bit number(s) that is/are appended to
the register name for bit addressing
Register location
in the internal
register file
Register address
(hexadecimal)
Register ID
Register name
FLAGS - System Flags Register
D5H
Set 1
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Bit Identifier
RESET Value
Read/Write
Bit Addressing
Mode
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
Register addressing mode only
.7
Carry Flag (C)
0
0
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition
Operation generates carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
.6
Zero Flag (Z)
0
0
Operation result is a non-zero value
Operation result is zero
.5
Sign Flag (S)
0
0
Operation generates positive number (MSB = "0")
Operation generates negative number (MSB = "1")
Description of the
effect of specific
bit settings
R = Read-only
W = Write-only
R/W = Read/write
'-' = Not used
RESET value notation:
'-' = Not used
'x' = Undetermined value
'0' = Logic zero
Bit number:
MSB = Bit 7
LSB = Bit 0
Type of addressing
that must be used to
address the bit
'1' = Logic one
(1-bit, 4-bit, or 8-bit)
Figure 4-1. Register Description Format
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
ADCON— A/D Converter Control Register
F7H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
.1
0
.0
0
0
Read/Write
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
.6–.4
A/D Input Pin Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ADC0
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
ADC5
ADC6
ADC7
.3
End-of-Conversion Bit (Read-only)
0
1
A/D conversion operation is in progress
A/D conversion operation is complete
.2–.1
Clock Source Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/16
fxx/8
fxx/4
fxx
.0
Start or Enable Bit
0
1
Disable operation
Start operation
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BTCON— Basic Timer Control Register
D3H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
.3–.2
Watchdog Timer Function Disable Code (for System Reset)
1
0
1
0
Disable watchdog timer function
Enable watchdog timer function
Other Values
Basic Timer Input Clock Selection Bits
(3)
0
0
fxx/4096
0
1
1
1
0
1
fxx/1024
fxx/128
fxx/1 (Not used)
(1)
.1
Basic Timer Counter Clear Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the basic timer counter value
(2)
.0
Clock Frequency Divider Clear Bit for Basic Timer
0
1
No effect
Clear both clock frequency dividers
NOTES:
1. When you write a “1” to BTCON.1, the basic timer counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write
operation, the BTCON.1 value is automatically cleared to “0”.
2. When you write a "1" to BTCON.0, the corresponding frequency divider is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the
write operation, the BTCON.0 value is automatically cleared to "0".
3. The fxx is selected clock for system (main OSC. or sub OSC.).
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
CLKCON— System Clock Control Register
D4H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
.4–.3
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
(note)
CPU Clock (System Clock) Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/16
fxx/8
fxx/2
fxx/1 (non-divided)
.2–.0
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
NOTE: After a reset, the slowest clock (divided by 16) is selected as the system clock. To select faster clock speeds, load
the appropriate values to CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
FLAGS — System Flags Register
D5H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Carry Flag (C)
0
1
Operation does not generate a carry or underflow condition
Operation generates a carry-out or underflow into high-order bit 7
Zero Flag (Z)
0
1
Operation result is a non-zero value
Operation result is zero
Sign Flag (S)
0
1
Operation generates a positive number (MSB = "0")
Operation generates a negative number (MSB = "1")
Overflow Flag (V)
0
1
Operation result is £ +127 or ³ –128
Operation result is > +127 or < –128
Decimal Adjust Flag (D)
0
1
Add operation completed
Subtraction operation completed
Half-Carry Flag (H)
0
1
No carry-out of bit 3 or no underflow into bit 3 by addition or subtraction
Addition generated carry-out of bit 3 or subtraction generated underflow into bit 3
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FIS)
0
1
Interrupt return (IRET) in progress (when read)
Fast interrupt service routine in progress (when read)
Bank Address Selection Flag (BA)
0
1
Bank 0 is selected
Bank 1 is selected
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
IMR— Interrupt Mask Register
DDH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable (mask)
Enable (un-mask)
NOTE: When an interrupt level is masked, any interrupt requests that may be issued are not recognized by the CPU.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
IPH— Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
DAH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte instruction pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP15–IP8). The lower byte of the IP address is located in the IPL
register (DBH).
IPL — Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
DBH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte instruction pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP7–IP0). The upper byte of the IP address is located in the IPH
register (DAH).
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
IPR— Interrupt Priority Register
FFH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7, .4, and .1
Priority Control Bits for Interrupt Groups A, B, and C
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Group priority undefined
B > C > A
A > B > C
B > A > C
C > A > B
C > B > A
A > C > B
Group priority undefined
.6
.5
.3
.2
.0
Interrupt Subgroup C Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ6 > IRQ7
IRQ7 > IRQ6
Interrupt Group C Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
(IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Interrupt Subgroup B Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ3 > IRQ4
IRQ4 > IRQ3
Interrupt Group B Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
(IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Interrupt Group A Priority Control Bit
0
1
IRQ0 > IRQ1
IRQ1 > IRQ0
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
IRQ— Interrupt Request Register
DCH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0) Request Pending Bit
0
1
Not pending
Pending
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
OSCCON — Oscillator Control Register
FBH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
.4
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
Sub-system Oscillator Driving Ability Control Bit
0
1
Strong driving ability
Normal driving ability
.3
.2
Main System Oscillator Control Bit
0
1
Main System Oscillator RUN
Main System Oscillator STOP
Sub System Oscillator Control Bit
0
1
Sub system oscillator RUN
Sub system oscillator STOP
.1
.0
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
System Clock Selection Bit
0
1
Main oscillator select
Subsystem oscillator select
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P0CONH— Port 0 Control Register (High Byte)
E6H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P0.7/TACAP Configuration Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up; TACAP input
Input mode; TACAP input
Push-pull output mode
P0.6/TACK Configuration Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up; TACK input
Input mode; TACK input
Push-pull output mode
P0.5/T1CAP0 Configuration Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up; T1CAP0 input
Input mode; T1CAP0 input
Push-pull output mode
P0.4/T1OUT1 Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: T1OUT1 output
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P0CONL — Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte)
E7H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
1
.2
1
1
1
.0
1
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
P0.3/T1CK1 Configuration Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up; T1CK1 input
Input mode; T1CK1 input
Push-pull output mode
P0.2/T1CAP1 Configuration Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up; T1CAP1 input
Input mode; T1CAP1 input
Push-pull output mode
P0.1/XTout Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: Sub oscillator output (XTout)
.1–.0
P0.0/XTin Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: Sub oscillator input (XTin)
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P1CONH— Port 1 Control Register (High Byte)
E8H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
.3–.2
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
P1.5/TXD Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: TXD output
.1–.0
P1.4/RXD Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; RXD input
Input mode; RXD input
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: RXD output
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P1CONL — Port 1 Control Register (Low Byte)
E9H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
P1.3/BZOUT Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: BZOUT output
.5–.4
P1.2/T1OUT0 Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: T1OUT0 output
.3–.2
.1–.0
P1.1/T1CK0 Configuration Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up; T1CK0 input
Input mode; T1CK0 input
Push-pull output mode
P1.0/TAOUT Configuration Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: TAOUT output
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P2CONH— Port 2 Control Register (High Byte)
EAH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5-.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P2.7/INT7
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT7)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT7)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT7)
Push-pull output mode
P2.6/ INT6
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT6)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT6)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT6)
Push-pull output mode
P2.5/ INT5
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT5)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT5)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT5)
Push-pull output mode
P2.4/INT4
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT4)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT4)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT4)
Push-pull output mode
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P2CONL — Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte)
EBH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P2.3/INT3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT3)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT3)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT3)
Push-pull output mode
P2.2/INT2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT2)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT2)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT2)
Push-pull output mode
P2.1/INT1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT1)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT1)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT1)
Push-pull output mode
P2.0/INT0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT0)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT0)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT0)
Push-pull output mode
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P2INT — Port 2 Interrupt Control Register
ECH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P2.7 External Interrupt (INT7) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.6 External Interrupt (INT6) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.5 External Interrupt (INT5) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.4 External Interrupt (INT4) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.3 External Interrupt (INT3) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.2 External Interrupt (INT2) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.1 External Interrupt (INT1) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P2.0 External Interrupt (INT0) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P2INTPND— Port 2 Interrupt Pending Register
EDH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
P2.7/PND7 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.6/PND6 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.5/PND5 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.4/PND4 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.3/PND3 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.2/PND2 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.1/PND1 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P2.0/PND0 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P3CONH— Port 3 Control Register (High Byte)
EEH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P3.7/ADC7
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC7 input
P3.6/ADC6
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC6 input
P3.5/ADC5
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC5 input
P3.4/ADC4
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC4 input
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P3CONL — Port 3 Control Register (Low Byte)
EFH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.3
.1–.0
P3.3/ADC3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC3 input
P3.2/ADC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC2 input
P3.1/ADC1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC1 input
P3.0/ADC0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: ADC0 input
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P4CONH— Port 4 Control Register (High Byte)
F0H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
.3–.2
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
P4.5
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
.1–.0
P4.4
0
0
1
0
1
X
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P4CONL — Port 4 Control Register (Low Byte)
F1H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
P4.3/TBPWM
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up
Input mode
Push-pull output mode
Alternative function mode: TBPWM output
P4.2/INT10
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT10)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT10)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT10)
Push-pull output mode
P4.1/INT9
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT9)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT9)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT9)
Push-pull output mode
P4.0/INT8
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT8)
Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT8)
Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT8)
Push-pull output mode
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P4INT — Port 4 Interrupt Control Register
F2H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.3
.2
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
P4.2 External Interrupt (INT10) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
.1
.0
P4.1 External Interrupt (INT9) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
P4.0 External Interrupt (INT8) Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
P4INTPND— Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register
F3H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.3
.2
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
P4.2/PND10 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
.1
.0
P4.1/PND9 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
P4.0/PND8 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
Interrupt request is not pending, pending bit clear when write 0
Interrupt request is pending
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PP— Register Page Pointer
DFH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
.3–.0
Destination Register Page Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Destination: page 0
Destination: page 1
Don’t care
Other values
Source Register Page Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Source: page 0
Source: page 1
Don’t care
Other values
NOTE: In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller, the internal register file is configured as two pages (Pages 0-1).
The pages 0-1 are used for the general-purpose register file and data register.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
RP0— Register Pointer 0
D6H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
1
.6
1
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
–
.1
–
.0
–
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing only
.7–.3
Register Pointer 0 Address Value
Register pointer 0 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two
8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP0
points to address C0H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice
C0H–C7H.
.2–.0
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RP1— Register Pointer 1
D7H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
1
.6
1
.5
0
.4
0
.3
1
.2
–
.1
–
.0
–
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
–
–
–
Addressing Mode
Register addressing only
.7–.3
Register Pointer 1 Address Value
Register pointer 1 can independently point to one of the 256-byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two
8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP1
points to address C8H in register set 1, selecting the 8-byte working register slice
C8H–CFH.
.2–.0
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SPH— Stack Pointer (High Byte)
D8H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte stack pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer
address (SP15–SP8). The lower byte of the stack pointer value is located in register
SPL (D9H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
SPL — Stack Pointer (Low Byte)
D9H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
x
.6
x
.5
x
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
x
.0
x
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte stack pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit stack pointer
address (SP7–SP0). The upper byte of the stack pointer value is located in register
SPH (D8H). The SP value is undefined following a reset.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
STPCON— Stop Control Register
E5H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.0
STOP Control Bits
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Enable stop instruction
Other values Disable stop instruction
NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, You must set this STPCON register as “10100101b”. Otherwise the STOP
instruction will not be executed.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SYM — System Mode Register
DEH
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
x
.3
x
.2
x
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
.4–.2
Not used, But you must keep always 0
Fast Interrupt Level Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRG2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
.1
.0
Fast Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable fast interrupt processing
Enable fast interrupt processing
(note)
Global Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable global interrupt processing
Enable global interrupt processing
NOTE: Following a reset, you enable global interrupt processing by executing an EI instruction (not by writing a "1" to
SYM.0).
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
T1CON0— Timer 1(0) Control Register
E8H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
Timer 1(0) Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/1024
fxx/256
fxx/64
fxx/8
fxx
External clock falling edge
External clock rising edge
Counter stop
.4–.3
Timer 1(0) Operating Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Interval mode
Capture mode (Capture on rising edge, OVF can occur)
Capture mode (Capture on falling edge, OVF can occur)
PWM mode
.2
.1
.0
Timer 1(0) Counter Enable Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the timer 1(0) counter (Auto-clear bit)
Timer 1(0) Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
Timer 1(0) Overflow Interrupt Enable
0
1
Disable overflow interrupt
Enable overflow interrupt
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
T1CON1— Timer 1(1) Control Register
E9H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.5
Timer 1(1) Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/1024
fxx/256
fxx/64
fxx/8
fxx
External clock falling edge
External clock rising edge
Counter stop
.4–.3
Timer 1(1) Operating Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Interval mode
Capture mode (Capture on rising edge, OVF can occur)
Capture mode (Capture on falling edge, OVF can occur)
PWM mode
.2
.1
.0
Timer 1(1) Counter Enable Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the timer 1(1) counter (Auto-clear bit)
Timer 1(1) Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
Timer 1(1) Overflow Interrupt Enable
0
1
Disable overflow interrupt
Enable overflow interrupt
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
TACON— Timer A Control Register
E1H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Timer A Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/1024
fxx/256
fxx/64
External clock (TACK)
.5–.4
Timer A Operating Mode Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Interval mode (TAOUT mode)
Capture mode (capture on rising edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
Capture mode (capture on falling edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
PWM mode (OVF interrupt can occur)
.3
.2
.1
.0
Timer A Counter Clear Bit
0
1
No effect
Clear the timer A counter (Auto-clear bit)
Timer A Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable overflow interrupt
Enable overflow interrupt
Timer A Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
Timer A Start/Stop Bit
0
1
Stop timer A
Start timer A
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
TBCON— Timer B Control Register
D0H
Set 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Timer B Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/4
fxx/8
fxx/64
fxx/256
.5–.4
Timer B Interrupt Time Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Elapsed time for low data value
Elapsed time for high data value
Elapsed time for low and high data values
Not Used
.3
.2
.1
.0
Timer B Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable interrupt
Enable interrupt
Timer B Start/Stop Bit
0
1
Stop timer B
Start timer B
Timer B Mode Selection Bit
0
1
One-shot mode
Repeating mode
Timer B Output flip-flop Control Bit
0
1
T-FF is low
T-FF is high
NOTE: fxx is selected clock for system.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
TINTPND— Timer A, Timer 1 Interrupt Pending Register
E0H
Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
–
–
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
.5
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
Timer 1(1) Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt pending
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Timer 1(1) Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt pending
Timer 1(0) Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt pending
Timer 1(0) Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt pending
Timer A Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt pending
Timer A Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit
0
0
1
No interrupt pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt pending
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UARTCON— UART Control Register
F6H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
Read/Write
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
.7–.6
Operating Mode and Baud Rate Selection Bits
0
0
1
0
1
X
Mode 0: Shift Register [fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA + 1))]
Mode 1: 8-bit UART [fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA + 1))]
Mode 2: 9-bit UART [fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA + 1))]
(1)
.5
.4
.3
Multiprocessor Communication
Enable Bit (for mode 2 only)
0
1
Disable
Enable
Serial Data Receive Enable Bit
0
1
Disable
Enable
If Parity disable mode (PEN = 0),
location of the 9th data bit to be transmitted in UART mode 2 ("0" or "1").
If Parity enable mode (PEN = 1),
even/odd parity selection bit for transmit data in UART mode 2.
0: Even parity bit generation for transmit data
1: Odd parity bit generation for transmit data
.2
If Parity disable (PEN = 0),
location of the 9th data bit that was received in UART mode 2 ("0" or "1").
If Parity enable mode (PEN = 1),
even/odd parity selection bit for receive data in UART mode 2.
0: Even parity check for the received data
1: Odd parity check for the received data
A result of parity error will be saved in RPE bit of the UARTPND register after parity
checking of the received data.
.1
.0
Receive Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable receive interrupt
Enable receive interrupt
Transmit Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable transmit interrupt
Enable transmit Interrupt
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
NOTES:
CONTROL REGISTER
1. In mode 2, if the MCE (UARTCON.5) bit is set to "1", then the receive interrupt will not be activated if the received
9th data bit is "0". In mode 1, if MCE = "1”, then the receive interrupt will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not
received. In mode 0, the MCE (UARTCON.5) bit should be "0".
2. The descriptions for 8-bit and 9-bit UART mode do not include start and stop bits for serial data receive and transmit.
3. Parity enable bits, PEN, are located in the UARTPND register at address F4H, bank 0.
4. Parity enable and parity error check can be available in 9-bit UART mode (Mode 2) only.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL REGISTERS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UARTPND— UART Pending and parity control
F4H
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
Read/Write
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
–
–
R/W
R/W
–
–
R/W
R/W
.7–.6
.5
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
UART Parity Enable/Disable (PEN)
0
1
Disable
Enable
.4
UART Receive Parity Error (RPE)
0
1
No error
Parity error
.3–.2
.1
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (must keep always 0)
UART Receive Interrupt Pending Flag
0
0
1
Not pending
Clear pending bit (when write)
Interrupt pending
.0
UART Transmit Interrupt Pending Flag
0
0
1
Not pending
Clear pending bit (when write)
Interrupt pending
NOTES:
1. In order to clear a data transmit or receive interrupt pending flag, you must write a "0" to the appropriate pending bit.
2. To avoid programming errors, we recommend using load instruction (except for LDB), when manipulating UARTPND
values.
3. Parity enable and parity error check can be available in 9-bit UART mode (Mode 2) only.
4. Parity error bit (RPE) will be refreshed whenever 8th receive data bit has been shifted.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONTROL REGISTER
WTCON— Watch Timer Control Register
FAH
Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
Reset Value
.7
0
.6
0
.5
0
.4
0
.3
0
.2
0
.1
0
.0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Watch Timer Clock Selection Bit
0
1
Main system clock divided by 256 (fxx/256)
Sub system clock (fxt)
.6
Watch Timer Interrupt Enable Bit
0
1
Disable watch timer interrupt
Enable watch timer interrupt
.5–.4
Buzzer Signal Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.5 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
1 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
2 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
4 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
.3–.2
Watch Timer Speed Selection Bits
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.5 s Interval
0.25 s Interval
0.125 s Interval
1.955 ms Interval
.1
.0
Watch Timer Enable Bit
0
1
Disable watch timer; Clear frequency dividing circuits
Enable watch timer
Watch Timer Interrupt Pending Bit
0
1
1
Interrupt is not pending
Clear pending bit when write
Interrupt is pending
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
5
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
OVERVIEW
The S3C8-series interrupt structure has three basic components: levels, vectors, and sources. The SAM8 CPU
recognizes up to eight interrupt levels and supports up to 128 interrupt vectors. When a specific interrupt level has
more than one vector address, the vector priorities are established in hardware. A vector address can be assigned to
one or more sources.
Levels
Interrupt levels are the main unit for interrupt priority assignment and recognition. All peripherals and I/O blocks can
issue interrupt requests. In other words, peripheral and I/O operations are interrupt-driven. There are eight possible
interrupt levels: IRQ0–IRQ7, also called level 0–level 7. Each interrupt level directly corresponds to an interrupt
request number (IRQn). The total number of interrupt levels used in the interrupt structure varies from device to
device. The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure recognizes eight interrupt levels.
The interrupt level numbers 0 through 7 do not necessarily indicate the relative priority of the levels. They are just
identifiers for the interrupt levels that are recognized by the CPU. The relative priority of different interrupt levels is
determined by settings in the interrupt priority register, IPR. Interrupt group and subgroup logic controlled by IPR
settings lets you define more complex priority relationships between different levels.
Vectors
Each interrupt level can have one or more interrupt vectors, or it may have no vector address assigned at all. The
maximum number of vectors that can be supported for a given level is 128 (The actual number of vectors used for
S3C8-series devices is always much smaller). If an interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector
priorities are set in hardware. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 uses twenty-one vectors.
Sources
A source is any peripheral that generates an interrupt. A source can be an external pin or a counter overflow. Each
vector can have several interrupt sources. In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure, there are twenty-one
possible interrupt sources.
When a service routine starts, the respective pending bit should be either cleared automatically by hardware or
cleared "manually" by program software. The characteristics of the source's pending mechanism determine which
method would be used to clear its respective pending bit.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT TYPES
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
The three components of the S3C8 interrupt structure described before — levels, vectors, and sources — are
combined to determine the interrupt structure of an individual device and to make full use of its available interrupt
logic. There are three possible combinations of interrupt structure components, called interrupt types 1, 2, and 3. The
types differ in the number of vectors and interrupt sources assigned to each level (see Figure 5-1):
Type 1:
Type 2:
Type 3:
One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + one source (S1)
One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn)
One level (IRQn) + multiple vectors (V1 – Vn) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn , Sn+1 – Sn+m)
In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller, two interrupt types are implemented.
Levels
Vectors
Sources
Type 1: IRQn
V1
S1
S1
Type 2: IRQn
V1
S2
S3
Sn
V1
V2
V3
Vn
S1
Type 3: IRQn
S2
S3
Sn
S n +1
S n +2
S n +m
NOTES:
1. The number of Sn and Vn value is expandable
2. In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 implementation, interrupt types 1 and 3 are used.
Figure 5-1. S3C8-Series Interrupt Types
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller supports twenty-one interrupt sources. All of the interrupt sources have
a corresponding interrupt vector address. Eight interrupt levels are recognized by the CPU in this device-specific
interrupt structure, as shown in Figure 5-2.
When multiple interrupt levels are active, the interrupt priority register (IPR) determines the order in which contending
interrupts are to be serviced. If multiple interrupts occur within the same interrupt level, the interrupt with the lowest
vector address is usually processed first (The relative priorities of multiple interrupts within a single level are fixed in
hardware).
When the CPU grants an interrupt request, interrupt processing starts. All other interrupts are disabled and the
program counter value and status flags are pushed to stack. The starting address of the service routine is fetched
from the appropriate vector address (plus the next 8-bit value to concatenate the full 16-bit address) and the service
routine is executed.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Levels
Vectors
Sources
Reset(Clear)
H/W
IRQ0
BEH
C0H
Timer B underflow
Timer A match/capture
H/W, S/W
IRQ1
C2H
C4H
C6H
Timer A overflow
H/W, S/W
H/W, S/W
Timer 1(0) match/capture
Timer 1(0) overflow
IRQ2
H/W, S/W
C8H
CAH
Timer 1(1) match/capture H/W, S/W
Timer 1(1) overflow
H/W, S/W
S/W
CCH
CEH
Watch timer
IRQ3
IRQ4
P2.0 external interrupt
S/W
D0H
D2H
D4H
P2.1 external interrupt
P2.2 external interrupt
P2.3 external interrupt
S/W
S/W
S/W
S/W
D6H
P2.4 external interrupt
IRQ5
D8H
DAH
DCH
P2.5 external interrupt
P2.6 external interrupt
P2.7 external interrupt
S/W
S/W
S/W
S/W
DEH
P4.0 external interrupt
IRQ6
IRQ7
E0H
E2H
P4.1 external interrupt
P4.2 external interrupt
S/W
S/W
E4H
E6H
UART data receive
UART data transmit
S/W
S/W
NOTES:
1. Within a given interrupt level, the lower vector address has high priority. For example, DCH has
higher priority than DEH within the level IRQ5 the priorities within each level are set at the factory.
2. External interrupts are triggered by a rising or falling edge, depending on the corresponding control
register setting.
Figure 5-2. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Interrupt Structure
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES
All interrupt vector addresses for the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure are stored in the vector address area
of the internal 16/32-Kbyte ROM, 0H–3FFFH/0H–7FFFH (see Figure 5-3).
You can allocate unused locations in the vector address area as normal program memory. If you do so, please be
careful not to overwrite any of the stored vector addresses (Table 5-1 lists all vector addresses).
The program reset address in the ROM is 0100H.
(Decimal)
32,767
(HEX)
7FFFH
32-Kbyte
Memory Area
16,383
3FFFH
16-Kbyte
Memory Area
0100H
FFH
RESET Address
255
0
Interrupt
Vector Area
00H
Figure 5-3. ROM Vector Address Area
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
Vector Address
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Reset/Clear
Table 5-1. Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Source
Request
Decimal
Value
Hex
Interrupt
Priority in
Level
H/W
S/W
Value
100H
E6H
E4H
E2H
E0H
DEH
DCH
DAH
D8H
D6H
D4H
D2H
D0H
CEH
CCH
CAH
C8H
C6H
C4H
C2H
C0H
BEH
Level
nRESET
IRQ7
256
230
228
226
224
222
220
218
216
214
212
210
208
206
204
202
200
198
196
194
192
190
Basic timer (WDT) overflow
–
1
0
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
–
3
2
1
0
1
0
–
Ö
UART transmit
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
UART receive
P4.2 external interrupt
P4.1 external interrupt
P4.0 external interrupt
P2.7 external interrupt
P2.6external interrupt
P2.5 external interrupt
P2.4 external interrupt
P2.3 external interrupt
P2.2 external interrupt
P2.1external interrupt
P2.0 external interrupt
Watch timer
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
IRQ2
Timer 1(1) overflow
Timer 1(1) match/capture
Timer 1(0) overflow
Timer 1(0) match/capture
Timer A overflow
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
Ö
IRQ1
IRQ0
Timer A match/capture
Timer B underflow
NOTES:
1. Interrupt priorities are identified in inverse order: "0" is the highest priority, "1" is the next highest, and so on.
2. If two or more interrupts within the same level contend, the interrupt with the lowest vector address usually has priority
over one with a higher vector address. The priorities within a given level are fixed in hardware.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
ENABLE/DISABLE INTERRUPT INSTRUCTIONS (EI, DI)
Executing the Enable Interrupts (EI) instruction globally enables the interrupt structure. All interrupts are then
serviced as they occur according to the established priorities.
NOTE
The system initialization routine executed after a reset must always contain an EI instruction to globally
enable the interrupt structure.
During the normal operation, you can execute the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction at any time to globally disable
interrupt processing. The EI and DI instructions change the value of bit 0 in the SYM register.
SYSTEM-LEVEL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS
In addition to the control registers for specific interrupt sources, four system-level registers control interrupt
processing:
— The interrupt mask register, IMR, enables (un-masks) or disables (masks) interrupt levels.
— The interrupt priority register, IPR, controls the relative priorities of interrupt levels.
— The interrupt request register, IRQ, contains interrupt pending flags for each interrupt level (as opposed to each
interrupt source).
— The system mode register, SYM, enables or disables global interrupt processing (SYM settings also enable fast
interrupts and control the activity of external interface, if implemented).
Table 5-2. Interrupt Control Register Overview
Control Register
ID
R/W
Function Description
Interrupt mask register
IMR
R/W
Bit settings in the IMR register enable or disable interrupt
processing for each of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0–IRQ7.
Interrupt priority register
IPR
R/W
Controls the relative processing priorities of the interrupt levels.
The seven levels of S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 are organized into
three groups: A, B, and C. Group A is IRQ0 and IRQ1, group B
is IRQ2, IRQ3 and IRQ4, and group C is IRQ5, IRQ6, and IRQ7.
Interrupt request register
System mode register
IRQ
R
This register contains a request pending bit for each interrupt
level.
SYM
R/W
This register enables/disables fast interrupt processing, dynamic
global interrupt processing.
NOTE: Before IMR register is changed to any value, all interrupts must be disable.
Using DI instruction is recommended.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT PROCESSING CONTROL POINTS
Interrupt processing can therefore be controlled in two ways: globally or by specific interrupt level and source. The
system-level control points in the interrupt structure are:
— Global interrupt enable and disable (by EI and DI instructions or by direct manipulation of SYM.0)
— Interrupt level enable/disable settings (IMR register)
— Interrupt level priority settings (IPR register)
— Interrupt source enable/disable settings in the corresponding peripheral control registers
NOTE
When writing an application program that handles interrupt processing, be sure to include the necessary
register file address (register pointer) information.
EI
S
R
Q
Interrupt Request Register
(Read-only)
Polling
Cycle
nRESET
IRQ0-IRQ7
Interrupts
Interrupt Priority
Register
Vector
Interrupt
Cycle
Interrupt Mask
Register
Global Interrupt Control (EI,
DI or SYM.0 manipulation)
Figure 5-4. Interrupt Function Diagram
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS
For each interrupt source there is one or more corresponding peripheral control registers that let you control the
interrupt generated by the related peripheral (see Table 5-3).
Table 5-3. Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers
Interrupt Source
Timer B underflow
Interrupt Level
Register(s)
TBCON
Location(s) in set1
D0H
IRQ0
TBDATAH, TBDATAL
TINTPND
D1H, D2H,
Timer A overflow
IRQ1
IRQ2
E0H, bank 1
Timer A match/capture
TACON
E1H, bank 1
TADATA
E2H, bank 1
TACNT
E3H, bank 1
Timer 1(0) match/capture
Timer 1(0) overflow
T1DATAH0,T1DATAL0
T1DATAH1,T1DATAL1
T1CON0, T1CON1
T1CNTH0, T1CNTL0
T1CNTH1, T1CNTL1
TINTPND
E4H, E5H, bank 1
E6H, E7H, bank 1
E8H, E9H, bank 1
EAH, EBH, bank 1
ECH, EDH, bank 1
E0H, bank 1
Timer 1(1) match/capture
Timer 1(1) overflow
Watch timer
IRQ3
IRQ4
WTCON
FAH, bank 0
P2.0 external interrupt
P2.1 external interrupt
P2.2 external interrupt
P2.3 external interrupt
P2.4 external interrupt
P2.5 external interrupt
P2.6 external interrupt
P2.7 external interrupt
P4.0 external interrupt
P4.1 external interrupt
P4.2 external interrupt
UART receive/transmit
P2CONL
EBH, bank 0
P2INT
ECH, bank 0
P2INTPND
EDH, bank 0
IRQ5
P2CONH
P2INT
EAH, bank 0
ECH, bank 0
EDH, bank 0
P2INTPND
IRQ6
IRQ7
P4CONL
P4INT
F1H, bank 0
F2H, bank 0
P4INTPND
F3H, bank 0
UARTCON
F6H, bank 0
UDATA, UARTPND
BRDATAH, BRDATAL
F5H, F4H, bank 0
EEH, EFH, bank 1
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SYSTEM MODE REGISTER (SYM)
The system mode register, SYM (set 1, DEH), is used to globally enable and disable interrupt processing (see
Figure 5-5).
A reset clears SYM.0 to "0".
The instructions EI and DI enable and disable global interrupt processing, respectively, by modifying the bit 0 value of
the SYM register. In order to enable interrupt processing an Enable Interrupt (EI) instruction must be included in the
initialization routine, which follows a reset operation. Although you can manipulate SYM.0 directly to enable and
disable interrupts during the normal operation, it is recommended to use the EI and DI instructions for this purpose.
System Mode Register (SYM)
DEH, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used for the S3C84E5/C84E9/
P84E9
Global interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable all interrupts processing
1 = Enable all interrupts processing
Fast interrupt level
selection bits:
Fast interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable fast interrupts processing
1 = Enable fast interrupts processing
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Figure 5-5. System Mode Register (SYM)
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT MASK REGISTER (IMR)
The interrupt mask register, IMR (set 1, DDH) is used to enable or disable interrupt processing for individual interrupt
levels. After a reset, all IMR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required settings by
the initialization routine.
Each IMR bit corresponds to a specific interrupt level: bit 1 to IRQ1, bit 2 to IRQ2, and so on. When the IMR bit of an
interrupt level is cleared to "0", interrupt processing for that level is disabled (masked). When you set a level's IMR bit
to "1", interrupt processing for the level is enabled (not masked).
The IMR register is mapped to register location DDH in set 1. Bit values can be read and written by instructions
using the Register addressing mode.
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
DDH ,Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Interrupt level # enable bit
0 = Disable IRQ# interrupt
1 = Enable IRQ# interrupt
Figure 5-6. Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER (IPR)
The interrupt priority register, IPR (set 1, bank 0, FFH), is used to set the relative priorities of the interrupt levels in
the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. After a reset, all IPR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be
written to their required settings by the initialization routine.
When more than one interrupt sources are active, the source with the highest priority level is serviced first. If two
sources belong to the same interrupt level, the source with the lower vector address usually has the priority (This
priority is fixed in hardware).
To support programming of the relative interrupt level priorities, they are organized into groups and subgroups by the
interrupt logic. Please note that these groups (and subgroups) are used only by IPR logic for the IPR register priority
definitions (see Figure 5-7):
Group A
Group B
Group C
IRQ0, IRQ1
IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4
IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
IPR
Group B
IPR
Group C
IPR
Group A
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
B21
IRQ2 IRQ3
B22
IRQ4
C21
IRQ5 IRQ6
C22
IRQ7
IRQ0
IRQ1
Figure 5-7. Interrupt Request Priority Groups
As you can see in Figure 5-8, IPR.7, IPR.4, and IPR.1 control the relative priority of interrupt groups A, B, and C. For
example, the setting "001B" for these bits would select the group relationship B > C > A. The setting "101B" would
select the relationship C > B > A.
The functions of the other IPR bit settings are as follows:
— IPR.5 controls the relative priorities of group C interrupts.
— Interrupt group C includes a subgroup that has an additional priority relationship among the interrupt levels 5, 6,
and 7. IPR.6 defines the subgroup C relationship. IPR.5 controls the interrupt group C.
— IPR.0 controls the relative priority setting of IRQ0 and IRQ1 interrupts.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
FFH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Group priority:
D7 D4 D1
Group A
0 = IRQ0 > IRQ1
1 = IRQ1 > IRQ0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 = Undefined
1 = B > C > A
0 = A > B >C
1 = B > A > C
0 = C > A > B
1 = C > B > A
0 = A > C > B
1 = Undefined
Group B
0 = IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
1 = (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Subgroup B
0 = IRQ3 > IRQ4
1 = IRQ4 > IRQ3
Group C
0 = IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
1 = (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Subgroup C
0 = IRQ6 > IRQ7
1 = IRQ7 > IRQ6
Figure 5-8. Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER (IRQ)
You can poll bit values in the interrupt request register, IRQ (set 1, DCH), to monitor interrupt request status for all
levels in the microcontroller’s interrupt structure. Each bit corresponds to the interrupt level of the same number: bit 0
to IRQ0, bit 1 to IRQ1, and so on. A "0" indicates that no interrupt request is currently being issued for that level. A
"1" indicates that an interrupt request has been generated for that level.
IRQ bit values are read-only addressable using Register addressing mode. You can read (test) the contents of the
IRQ register at any time using bit or byte addressing to determine the current interrupt request status of specific
interrupt levels. After a reset, all IRQ status bits are cleared to “0”.
You can poll IRQ register values even if a DI instruction has been executed (that is, if global interrupt processing is
disabled). If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt structure is disabled, the CPU will not service it. You can,
however, still detect the interrupt request by polling the IRQ register. In this way, you can determine which events
occurred while the interrupt structure was globally disabled.
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
DCH ,Set 1, R
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Interrupt level # request pending bit
0 = IRQ# interrupt is not pending
1 = IRQ# interrupt is pending
Figure 5-9. Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
INTERRUPT PENDING FUNCTION TYPES
Overview
There are two types of interrupt pending bits: one type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt
service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared in the interrupt service routine.
Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware
For interrupt pending bits that are cleared automatically by hardware, interrupt logic sets the corresponding pending
bit to "1" when a request occurs. It then issues an IRQ pulse to inform the CPU that an interrupt is waiting to be
serviced. The CPU acknowledges the interrupt source by sending an IACK, executes the service routine, and clears
the pending bit to "0". This type of pending bit is not mapped and cannot, therefore, be read or written by application
software.
In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure, the timer B underflow interrupt (IRQ0) belongs to this category of
interrupts in which pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware.
Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine
The second type of pending bit is the one that should be cleared by program software. The service routine must clear
the appropriate pending bit before a return-from-interrupt subroutine (IRET) occurs. To do this, a "0" must be written
to the corresponding pending bit location in the source’s mode or control register.
In the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure, pending conditions for IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, IRQ6, and IRQ7 must be
cleared in the interrupt service routine.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT SOURCE POLLING SEQUENCE
The interrupt request polling and servicing sequence is as follows:
1. A source generates an interrupt request by setting the interrupt request bit to "1".
2. The CPU polling procedure identifies a pending condition for that source.
3. The CPU checks the interrupt level of source.
4. The CPU generates an interrupt acknowledge signal.
5. Interrupt logic determines the interrupt's vector address.
6. The service routine starts and the source's pending bit is cleared to "0" (by hardware or by software).
7. The CPU continues polling for interrupt requests.
INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES
Before an interrupt request is serviced, the following conditions must be met:
— Interrupt processing must be globally enabled (EI, SYM.0 = "1")
— The interrupt level must be enabled (IMR register)
— The interrupt level must have the highest priority if more than one level is currently requesting service
— The interrupt must be enabled at the interrupt's source (peripheral control register)
When all the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is acknowledged at the end of the instruction cycle. The
CPU then initiates an interrupt machine cycle that completes the following processing sequence:
1. Reset (clear to "0") the interrupt enable bit in the SYM register (SYM.0) to disable all subsequent interrupts.
2. Save the program counter (PC) and status flags to the system stack.
3. Branch to the interrupt vector to fetch the address of the service routine.
4. Pass control to the interrupt service routine.
When the interrupt service routine is completed, the CPU issues an Interrupt Return (IRET). The IRET restores the
PC and status flags, setting SYM.0 to "1". It allows the CPU to process the next interrupt request.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE
GENERATING INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESSES
The interrupt vector area in the ROM (00H–FFH) contains the addresses of interrupt service routines that correspond
to each level in the interrupt structure. Vectored interrupt processing follows this sequence:
1. Push the program counter's low-byte value to the stack.
2. Push the program counter's high-byte value to the stack.
3. Push the FLAG register values to the stack.
4. Fetch the service routine's high-byte address from the vector location.
5. Fetch the service routine's low-byte address from the vector location.
6. Branch to the service routine specified by the concatenated 16-bit vector address.
NOTE
A 16-bit vector address always begins at an even-numbered ROM address within the range of 00H–FFH.
NESTING OF VECTORED INTERRUPTS
It is possible to nest a higher-priority interrupt request while a lower-priority request is being serviced. To do this, you
must follow these steps:
1. Push the current 8-bit interrupt mask register (IMR) value to the stack (PUSH IMR).
2. Load the IMR register with a new mask value that enables only the higher priority interrupt.
3. Execute an EI instruction to enable interrupt processing (a higher priority interrupt will be processed if it occurs).
4. When the lower-priority interrupt service routine ends, restore the IMR to its original value by returning the
previous mask value from the stack (POP IMR).
5. Execute an IRET.
Depending on the application, you may be able to simplify the procedure above to some extent.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
6
INSTRUCTION SET
OVERVIEW
The instruction set is specifically designed to support large register files that are typical of most S3C8-series
microcontrollers. There are 78 instructions. The powerful data manipulation capabilities and features of the instruction
set include:
— A full complement of 8-bit arithmetic and logic operations, including multiply and divide
— No special I/O instructions (I/O control/data registers are mapped directly into the register file)
— Decimal adjustment included in binary-coded decimal (BCD) operations
— 16-bit (word) data can be incremented and decremented
— Flexible instructions for bit addressing, rotate, and shift operations
DATA TYPES
The CPU performs operations on bits, bytes, BCD digits, and two-byte words. Bits in the register file can be set,
cleared, complemented, and tested. Bits within a byte are numbered from 7 to 0, where bit 0 is the least significant
(right-most) bit.
REGISTER ADDRESSING
To access an individual register, an 8-bit address in the range 0–255 or the 4-bit address of a working register is
specified. Paired registers can be used to construct 16-bit data, 16-bit program memory or data memory addresses.
For detailed information about register addressing, please refer to Chapter 2, "Address Spaces."
ADDRESSING MODES
There are seven explicit addressing modes: Register (R), Indirect Register (IR), Indexed (X), Direct (DA), Relative
(RA), Immediate (IM), and Indirect (IA). For detailed descriptions of these addressing modes, please refer to Chapter
3, "Addressing Modes."
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Load Instructions
CLR
dst
Clear
LD
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst
Load
LDB
Load bit
LDE
Load external data memory
Load program memory
LDC
LDED
LDCD
LDEI
Load external data memory and decrement
Load program memory and decrement
Load external data memory and increment
Load program memory and increment
Load external data memory with pre-decrement
Load program memory with pre-decrement
Load external data memory with pre-increment
Load program memory with pre-increment
Load word
LDCI
LDEPD
LDCPD
LDEPI
LDCPI
LDW
POP
Pop from stack
POPUD
POPUI
PUSH
PUSHUD
PUSHUI
dst,src
dst,src
src
Pop user stack (decrementing)
Pop user stack (incrementing)
Push to stack
dst,src
dst,src
Push user stack (decrementing)
Push user stack (incrementing)
NOTE: LDE, LDED, LDEI, LDEPP, and LDEPI instructions can be used to read/write the data from the 64-Kbyte data
memory.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued)
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Arithmetic Instructions
ADC
ADD
CP
dst,src
Add with carry
Add
dst,src
dst,src
dst
Compare
DA
Decimal adjust
Decrement
Decrement word
Divide
DEC
DECW
DIV
dst
dst
dst,src
dst
INC
Increment
INCW
MULT
SBC
SUB
dst
Increment word
Multiply
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
Subtract with carry
Subtract
Logic Instructions
AND
COM
OR
dst,src
dst
Logical AND
Complement
dst,src
dst,src
Logical OR
XOR
Logical exclusive OR
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Continued)
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Program Control Instructions
BTJRF
BTJRT
CALL
CPIJE
CPIJNE
DJNZ
ENTER
EXIT
dst,src
Bit test and jump relative on false
Bit test and jump relative on true
Call procedure
dst,src
dst
dst,src
dst,src
r,dst
Compare, increment and jump on equal
Compare, increment and jump on non-equal
Decrement register and jump on non-zero
Enter
Exit
IRET
JP
Interrupt return
Jump on condition code
Jump unconditional
Jump relative on condition code
Next
cc,dst
dst
JP
JR
cc,dst
NEXT
RET
Return
WFI
Wait for interrupt
Bit Manipulation Instructions
BAND
BCP
BITC
BITR
BITS
BOR
BXOR
TCM
TM
dst,src
dst,src
dst
Bit AND
Bit compare
Bit complement
Bit reset
dst
dst
Bit set
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
dst,src
Bit OR
Bit XOR
Test complement under mask
Test under mask
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-1. Instruction Group Summary (Concluded)
Operands Instruction
Mnemonic
Rotate and Shift Instructions
RL
dst
dst
dst
dst
dst
dst
Rotate left
RLC
RR
Rotate left through carry
Rotate right
RRC
SRA
SWAP
Rotate right through carry
Shift right arithmetic
Swap nibbles
CPU Control Instructions
CCF
DI
Complement carry flag
Disable interrupts
Enable interrupts
Enter Idle mode
No operation
EI
IDLE
NOP
RCF
SB0
SB1
SCF
Reset carry flag
Set bank 0
Set bank 1
Set carry flag
SRP
src
Set register pointers
Set register pointer 0
Set register pointer 1
Enter Stop mode
SRP0
SRP1
STOP
src
src
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
FLAGS REGISTER (FLAGS)
The flags register FLAGS contains eight bits which describe the current status of CPU operations. Four of these bits,
FLAGS.7–FLAGS.4, can be tested and used with conditional jump instructions. Two other flag bits, FLAGS.3 and
FLAGS.2, are used for BCD arithmetic.
The FLAGS register also contains a bit to indicate the status of fast interrupt processing (FLAGS.1) and a bank
address status bit (FLAGS.0) to indicate whether register bank 0 or bank 1 is currently being addressed.
FLAGS register can be set or reset by instructions as long as its outcome does not affect the flags, such as, Load
instruction. Logical and Arithmetic instructions such as, AND, OR, XOR, ADD, and SUB can affect the Flags
register. For example, the AND instruction updates the Zero, Sign and Overflow flags based on the outcome of the
AND instruction. If the AND instruction uses the Flags register as the destination, then two write will simultaneously
occur to the Flags register producing an unpredictable result.
System Flags Register (FLAGS)
D5H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Bank address
status flag (BA)
Carry flag (C)
Fast interrupt
status flag (FS)
Zero flag (Z)
Sign flag (S)
Overflow flag (V)
Half-carry flag (H)
Decimal adjust flag (D)
Figure 6-1. System Flags Register (FLAGS)
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
FLAG DESCRIPTIONS
INSTRUCTION SET
C
Carry Flag (FLAGS.7)
The C flag is set to "1" if the result from an arithmetic operation generates a carry-out from or a borrow to
the bit 7 position (MSB). After rotate and shift operations have been performed, it contains the last value
shifted out of the specified register. Program instructions can set, clear, or complement the carry flag.
Z
S
V
D
Zero Flag (FLAGS.6)
For arithmetic and logic operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result of the operation is zero. In operations
that test register bits, and in shift and rotate operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result is logic zero.
Sign Flag (FLAGS.5)
Following arithmetic, logic, rotate, or shift operations, the sign bit identifies the state of the MSB of the
result. A logic zero indicates a positive number and a logic one indicates a negative number.
Overflow Flag (FLAGS.4)
The V flag is set to "1" when the result of a two's-complement operation is greater than + 127 or less than –
128. It is cleared to "0" after a logic operation has been performed.
Decimal Adjust Flag (FLAGS.3)
The DA bit is used to specify what type of instruction was executed last during BCD operations so that a
subsequent decimal adjust operation can execute correctly. The DA bit is not usually accessed by
programmers, and it cannot be addressed as a test condition.
H
Half-Carry Flag (FLAGS.2)
The H bit is set to "1" whenever an addition generates a carry-out of bit 3, or when a subtraction borrows out
of bit 4. It is used by the Decimal Adjust (DA) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or
subtraction into the correct decimal (BCD) result. The H flag is normally not accessed directly by a program.
FIS Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FLAGS.1)
The FIS bit is set during a fast interrupt cycle and reset during the IRET following interrupt servicing. When
set, it inhibits all interrupts and causes the fast interrupt return to be executed when the IRET instruction is
executed.
BA Bank Address Flag (FLAGS.0)
The BA flag indicates which register bank in the set 1 area of the internal register file is currently selected,
bank 0 or bank 1. The BA flag is cleared to "0" (select bank 0) when the SB0 instruction is executed and is
set to "1" (select bank 1) when the SB1 instruction is executed.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET NOTATION
Table 6-2. Flag Notation Conventions
Flag
C
Z
Description
Carry flag
Zero flag
S
Sign flag
V
Overflow flag
D
H
0
Decimal-adjust flag
Half-carry flag
Cleared to logic zero
Set to logic one
1
*
Set or cleared according to operation
Value is unaffected
Value is undefined
–
x
Table 6-3. Instruction Set Symbols
Symbol
Description
Destination operand
dst
src
@
Source operand
Indirect register address prefix
Program counter
PC
IP
Instruction pointer
FLAGS
RP
#
Flags register (D5H)
Register pointer
Immediate operand or register address prefix
Hexadecimal number suffix
Decimal number suffix
Binary number suffix
Opcode
H
D
B
opc
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Notation
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-4. Instruction Notation Conventions
Description Actual Operand Range
cc
r
Condition code
Working register only
See list of condition codes in Table 6-6.
Rn (n = 0–15)
rb
r0
rr
Bit (b) of working register
Rn.b (n = 0–15, b = 0–7)
Rn (n = 0–15)
Bit 0 (LSB) of working register
Working register pair
RRp (p = 0, 2, 4, ..., 14)
reg or Rn (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15)
reg.b (reg = 0–255, b = 0–7)
R
Register or working register
Bit "b" of register or working register
Register pair or working register pair
Rb
RR
reg or RRp (reg = 0–254, even number only,
where p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
IA
Indirect addressing mode
addr (addr = 0–254, even number only)
@Rn (n = 0–15)
Ir
Indirect working register only
IR
Irr
Indirect register or indirect working register @Rn or @reg (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15)
Indirect working register pair only
@RRp (p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
IRR
Indirect register pair or indirect working
register pair
@RRp or @reg (reg = 0–254, even only,
where p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
X
Indexed addressing mode
#reg[Rn] (reg = 0–255, n = 0–15)
XS
Indexed (short offset) addressing mode
#addr[RRp] (addr = range –128 to +127,
where p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
XL
Indexed (long offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range 0–65535, where
p = 2, ..., 14)
DA
RA
Direct addressing mode
Relative addressing mode
addr (addr = range 0–65535)
addr (addr = a number from +127 to –128 that is an
offset relative to the address of the next instruction)
IM
Immediate addressing mode
#data (data = 0–255)
IML
Immediate (long) addressing mode
#data (data = 0–65535)
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 6-5. OPCODE Quick Reference
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
–
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
U
P
P
E
R
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
DEC
R1
DEC
IR1
ADD
r1,r2
ADD
r1,Ir2
ADD
R2,R1
ADD
IR2,R1
ADD
R1,IM
BOR
r0–Rb
RLC
R1
RLC
IR1
ADC
r1,r2
ADC
r1,Ir2
ADC
R2,R1
ADC
IR2,R1
ADC
R1,IM
BCP
r1.b, R2
INC
R1
INC
IR1
SUB
r1,r2
SUB
r1,Ir2
SUB
R2,R1
SUB
IR2,R1
SUB
R1,IM
BXOR
r0–Rb
JP
IRR1
SRP/0/1
IM
SBC
r1,r2
SBC
r1,Ir2
SBC
R2,R1
SBC
IR2,R1
SBC
R1,IM
BTJR
r2.b, RA
DA
R1
DA
IR1
OR
r1,r2
OR
r1,Ir2
OR
R2,R1
OR
IR2,R1
OR
R1,IM
LDB
r0–Rb
POP
R1
POP
IR1
AND
r1,r2
AND
r1,Ir2
AND
R2,R1
AND
IR2,R1
AND
R1,IM
BITC
r1.b
N
I
COM
R1
COM
IR1
TCM
r1,r2
TCM
r1,Ir2
TCM
R2,R1
TCM
IR2,R1
TCM
R1,IM
BAND
r0–Rb
PUSH
R2
PUSH
IR2
TM
r1,r2
TM
r1,Ir2
TM
R2,R1
TM
IR2,R1
TM
R1,IM
BIT
r1.b
B
B
L
E
DECW
RR1
DECW
IR1
PUSHUD
IR1,R2
PUSHUI
IR1,R2
MULT
R2,RR1
MULT
IR2,RR1
MULT
IM,RR1
LD
r1, x, r2
RL
R1
RL
IR1
POPUD
IR2,R1
POPUI
IR2,R1
DIV
R2,RR1
DIV
IR2,RR1
DIV
IM,RR1
LD
r2, x, r1
INCW
RR1
INCW
IR1
CP
r1,r2
CP
r1,Ir2
CP
R2,R1
CP
IR2,R1
CP
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2, xL
CLR
R1
CLR
IR1
XOR
r1,r2
XOR
r1,Ir2
XOR
R2,R1
XOR
IR2,R1
XOR
R1,IM
LDC
r2, Irr2, xL
RRC
R1
RRC
IR1
CPIJE
Ir,r2,RA
LDC
r1,Irr2
LDW
RR2,RR1
LDW
IR2,RR1
LDW
RR1,IML
LD
r1, Ir2
H
E
X
SRA
R1
SRA
IR1
CPIJNE
Irr,r2,RA
LDC
r2,Irr1
CALL
IA1
LD
IR1,IM
LD
Ir1, r2
RR
R1
RR
IR1
LDCD
r1,Irr2
LDCI
r1,Irr2
LD
R2,R1
LD
R2,IR1
LD
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2, xs
SWAP
R1
SWAP
IR1
LDCPD
r2,Irr1
LDCPI
r2,Irr1
CALL
IRR1
LD
IR2,R1
CALL
DA1
LDC
r2, Irr1, xs
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
Table 6-5. OPCODE Quick Reference (Continued)
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
–
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
P
P
E
R
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
NEXT
ENTER
EXIT
WFI
SB0
SB1
IDLE
STOP
DI
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
¯
N
I
B
B
L
E
EI
RET
IRET
RCF
SCF
CCF
NOP
H
E
X
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CONDITION CODES
The opcode of a conditional jump always contains a 4-bit field called the condition code (cc). This specifies under
which conditions it is to execute the jump. For example, a conditional jump with the condition code for "equal" after a
compare operation only jumps if the two operands are equal. Condition codes are listed in Table 6-6.
The carry (C), zero (Z), sign (S), and overflow (V) flags are used to control the operation of conditional jump
instructions.
Table 6-6. Condition Codes
Binary
Mnemonic
Description
Flags Set
0000
1000
F
T
C
Always false
Always true
Carry
–
–
(1)
C = 1
0111
1111
0110
(1)
(1)
(1)
NC
Z
No carry
Zero
C = 0
Z = 1
Z = 0
NZ
Not zero
1110
1101
0101
0100
1100
PL
MI
Plus
S = 0
S = 1
V = 1
V = 0
Z = 1
Minus
OV
Overflow
No overflow
Equal
NOV
EQ
(1)
(1)
0110
NE
Not equal
Z = 0
1110
1001
0001
1010
0010
GE
LT
Greater than or equal
Less than
(S XOR V) = 0
(S XOR V) = 1
(Z OR (S XOR V)) = 0
(Z OR (S XOR V)) = 1
C = 0
GT
LE
Greater than
Less than or equal
Unsigned greater than or equal
(1)
(1)
UGE
1111
ULT
Unsigned less than
C = 1
0111
1011
0011
UGT
ULE
Unsigned greater than
(C = 0 AND Z = 0) = 1
(C OR Z) = 1
Unsigned less than or equal
NOTES:
1. It indicate condition codes which are related to two different mnemonics but which test the same flag. For
example, Z and EQ are both true if the zero flag (Z) is set, but after an ADD instruction, Z would probably be used.
Following a CP instruction, you would probably want to use the instruction EQ.
2. For operations using unsigned numbers, the special condition codes UGE, ULT, UGT, and ULE must be used.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS
This Chapter contains detailed information and programming examples for each instruction in the S3C8-series
instruction set. Information is arranged in a consistent format for improved readability and for quick reference. The
following information is included in each instruction description:
— Instruction name (mnemonic)
— Full instruction name
— Source/destination format of the instruction operand
— Shorthand notation of the instruction's operation
— Textual description of the instruction's effect
— Flag settings that may be affected by the instruction
— Detailed description of the instruction's format, execution time, and addressing mode(s)
— Programming example(s) explaining how to use the instruction
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ADC— Add with Carry
ADC
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + src + c
The source operand, along with the carry flag setting, is added to the destination operand and the
sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement
addition is performed. In multiple-precision arithmetic, this instruction lets the carry value from the
addition of low-order operands be carried into the addition of high-order operands.
Flags:
C: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurs, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the
result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
cleared otherwise.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
12
13
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
14
15
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
16
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C flag = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H, and
register 03H = 0AH:
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 14H, R2 = 03H
R1 = 1BH, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 32H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#11H
In the first example, the destination register R1 contains the value 10H, the carry flag is set to "1"
and the source working register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "ADC R1,R2" adds
03H and the carry flag value ("1") to the destination value 10H, leaving 14H in the register R1.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
ADD— Add
ADD
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + src
The source operand is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination.
The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement addition is performed.
Flags:
C: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the
result is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if a carry from the low-order nibble occurred.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
02
03
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
04
05
R
R
R
IR
dst
06
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 15H, R2 = 03H
R1 = 1CH, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 24H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 2BH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 46H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#25H
In the first example, the destination working register R1 contains 12H and the source working
register R2 contains 03H. The statement "ADD R1,R2" adds 03H to 12H, leaving the value 15H
in the register R1.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
AND — Logical AND
AND
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst AND src
The source operand is logically ANDed with the destination operand. The result is stored in the
destination. The AND operation causes a "1" bit to be stored whenever the corresponding bits in the
two operands are both logic ones; otherwise a "0" bit value is stored. The contents of the source are
unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
52
53
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
54
55
R
R
R
IR
dst
56
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H
R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 01H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 00H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 21H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#25H
In the first example, the destination working register R1 contains the value 12H and the source
working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "AND R1,R2" logically ANDs the source
operand 03H with the destination operand value 12H, leaving the value 02H in the register R1.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
BAND— Bit AND
BAND
dst,src.b
dst.b,src
BAND
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ dst(0) AND src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ dst(b) AND src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ANDed with the zero bit (LSB) of the
destination (or the source). The resultant bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other
bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
3
6
6
67
67
r0
Rb
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or the source) address is
four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 05H:
BAND
BAND
R1,01H.1
01H.1,R1
®
®
R1 = 06H, register 01H = 05H
Register 01H = 05H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, the source register 01H contains the value 05H (00000101B) and the
destination working register R1 contains 07H (00000111B). The statement "BAND R1,01H.1"
ANDs the bit 1 value of the source register ("0") with the bit 0 value of the register R1
(destination), leaving the value 06H (00000110B) in the register R1.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BCP— Bit Compare
BCP
dst,src.b
Operation:
dst(0) – src(b)
The specified bit of the source is compared to (subtracted from) bit zero (LSB) of the destination.
The zero flag is set if the bits are the same; otherwise it is cleared. The contents of both operands
are unaffected by the comparison.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the two bits are the same; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
17
r0
Rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit
address "0" is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 01H:
BCP
R1,01H.1
®
R1 = 07H, register 01H = 01H
If the destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the source register
01H contains the value 01H (00000001B), the statement "BCP R1,01H.1" compares bit one of the
source register (01H) and bit zero of the destination register (R1). Because the bit values are not
identical, the zero flag bit (Z) is cleared in the FLAGS register (0D5H).
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
BITC— Bit Complement
BITC
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ¬ NOT dst(b)
This instruction complements the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bit in
the destination.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
2
4
57
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit
address “b” is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H
BITC
R1.1
®
R1 = 05H
If the working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITC R1.1"
complements bit one of the destination and leaves the value 05H (00000101B) in the register R1.
Because the result of the complement is not "0", the zero flag (Z) in the FLAGS register (0D5H) is
cleared.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BITR— Bit Reset
BITR
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ¬ 0
The BITR instruction clears the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bit in
the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst | b | 0
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit
address “0” is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BITR
R1.1
®
R1 = 05H
If the value of the working register R1 is 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITR R1.1" clears bit one
of the destination register R1, leaving the value 05H (00000101B).
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
BITS — Bit Set
BITS
dst.b
Operation:
dst(b) ¬
1
The BITS instruction sets the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bit in the
destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst | b | 1
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit
address “b” is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BITS
R1.3
®
R1 = 0FH
If the working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITS R1.3" sets bit
three of the destination register R1 to "1", leaving the value 0FH (00001111B).
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BOR— Bit OR
BOR
BOR
dst,src.b
dst.b,src
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ dst(0) OR src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ dst(b) OR src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the
destination (or the source). The resulting bit value is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No
other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
07
r0
Rb
3
6
07
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction format, the destination (or the source)
address is four bits, the bit address “b” is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 03H:
BOR
BOR
R1, 01H.1
01H.2, R1
®
®
R1 = 07H, register 01H = 03H
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, the destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the
source register 01H the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BOR R1,01H.1" logically ORs bit
one of the register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). This leaves the same value (07H) in
the working register R1.
In the second example, the destination register 01H contains the value 03H (00000011B) and the
source working register R1 the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "BOR 01H.2,R1" logically
ORs bit two of the register 01H (destination) with bit zero of R1 (source). This leaves the value 07H
in the register 01H.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
BTJRF — Bit Test, Jump Relative on False
BTJRF
dst,src.b
Operation:
If src(b) is a "0", then PC ¬ PC + dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "0", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is currently in the program
counter. Otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRF instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
(note)
dst
src
opc
src | b | 0
dst
3
10
37
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address "b"
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BTJRF
SKIP,R1.3
®
PC jumps to SKIP location
If the working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRF SKIP,R1.3"
tests bit 3. Because it is "0", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the
memory location pointed to by the SKIP (Remember that the memory location must be within the
allowed range of + 127 to – 128).
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BTJRT — Bit Test, Jump Relative on True
BTJRT
dst,src.b
Operation:
If src(b) is a "1", then PC ¬ PC + dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "1", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC.
Otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRT instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
(note)
dst
src
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
10
37
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address "b" is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BTJRT
SKIP,R1.1
If the working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRT SKIP,R1.1"
tests bit one in the source register (R1). Because it is a "1", the relative address is added to the PC
and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP.
Remember that the memory location addressed by the BTJRT instruction must be within the allowed
range of + 127 to – 128.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
BXOR— Bit XOR
BXOR
dst,src.b
dst.b,src
BXOR
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ dst(0) XOR src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ dst(b) XOR src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically exclusive-ORed with bit zero (LSB) of
the destination (or the source). The result bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No
other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
27
r0
Rb
3
6
27
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction format, the destination (or the source) address is four
bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H (00000111B) and register 01H = 03H (00000011B):
BXOR
BXOR
R1,01H.1
01H.2,R1
®
®
R1 = 06H, register 01H = 03H
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, the destination working register R1 has the value 07H (00000111B) and the
source register 01H has the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BXOR R1,01H.1" exclusive-
ORs bit one of the register 01H (the source) with bit zero of R1 (the destination). The result bit value
is stored in bit zero of R1, changing its value from 07H to 06H. The value of the source register 01H
is unaffected.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CALL — Call Procedure
CALL
dst
Operation:
SP ¬ SP–1
@SP ¬ PCL
SP ¬ SP–1
@SP ¬ PCH
PC ¬ dst
The contents of the program counter are pushed onto the top of the stack. The program counter
value used is the address of the first instruction following the CALL instruction. The specified
destination address is then loaded into the program counter and points to the first instruction of a
procedure. At the end of the procedure the return instruction (RET) can be used to return to the
original program flow. RET pops the top of the stack back into the program counter.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
opc
opc
dst
3
2
2
14
12
14
F6
F4
D4
DA
IRR
IA
dst
dst
Examples:
Given: R0 = 35H, R1 = 21H, PC = 1A47H, and SP = 0002H:
CALL
3521H
®
SP = 0000H
(Memory locations 0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 4AH,
where, 4AH is the address that follows the instruction.)
SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
CALL
CALL
@RR0
#40H
®
®
In the first example, if the program counter value is 1A47H and the stack pointer contains the value
0002H, the statement "CALL 3521H" pushes the current PC value onto the top of the stack. The
stack pointer now points to the memory location 0000H. The PC is then loaded with the value
3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed.
If the contents of the program counter and the stack pointer are the same as in the first example,
the statement "CALL @RR0" produces the same result except that the 49H is stored in stack
location 0001H (because the two-byte instruction format was used). The PC is then loaded with the
value 3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. Assuming
that the contents of the program counter and the stack pointer are the same as in the first example,
if the program address 0040H contains 35H and the program address 0041H contains 21H, the
statement "CALL #40H" produces the same result as in the second example.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
CCF — Complement Carry Flag
CCF
Operation:
C ¬ NOT C
The carry flag (C) is complemented. If C = "1", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic zero. If
C = "0", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic one.
Flags:
C:
Complemented.
No other flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
EF
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "0":
CCF
If the carry flag = "0", the CCF instruction complements it in the FLAGS register (0D5H), changing
its value from logic zero to logic one.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CLR — Clear
CLR
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ "0"
The destination location is cleared to "0".
No flags are affected.
Flags:
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
B0
R
B1
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 4FH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 5EH:
CLR
CLR
00H
@01H
®
®
Register 00H = 00H
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 00H
In Register (R) addressing mode, the statement "CLR 00H" clears the destination register 00H
value to 00H.
In the second example, the statement "CLR @01H" uses Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to
clear the 02H register value to 00H.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
COM — Complement
COM
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ NOT dst
The contents of the destination location are complemented (one's complement). All "1s" are
changed to "0s", and vice-versa.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
60
61
R
IR
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 07H = 0F1H:
COM
COM
R1
@R1
®
®
R1 = 0F8H
R1 = 07H, register 07H = 0EH
In the first example, the destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B). The
statement "COM R1" complements all the bits in R1: all logic ones are changed to logic zeros, and
logic zeros to logic ones, leaving the value 0F8H (11111000B).
In the second example, Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode is used to complement the value of
the destination register 07H (11110001B), leaving the new value 0EH (00001110B).
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CP— Compare
CP
dst,src
dst–src
Operation:
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand, and the appropriate
flags are set accordingly. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the comparison.
Flags:
C: Set if a "borrow" occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
A2
A3
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
A4
A5
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
A6
R
IM
Examples:
1. Given: R1 = 02H and R2 = 03H:
CP R1,R2
®
Set the C and S flags
The destination working register R1 contains the value 02H and the source register R2 contains the
value 03H. The statement "CP R1,R2" subtracts the R2 value (source/subtrahend) from the R1
value (destination/minuend). Because a "borrow" occurs and the difference is negative, the C and
the S flag values are "1".
2. Given: R1 = 05H and R2 = 0AH:
CP
R1,R2
JP
INC
SKIP
UGE,SKIP
R1
LD R3,R1
In this example, the destination working register R1 contains the value 05H which is less than the
contents of the source working register R2 (0AH). The statement "CP R1,R2" generates C = "1"
and the JP instruction does not jump to the SKIP location. After the statement "LD R3,R1"
executes, the value 06H remains in the working register R3.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
CPIJE— Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal
CPIJE
dst,src,RA
Operation:
If dst–src = "0", PC ¬ PC + RA
Ir ¬ Ir + 1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is "0", the
relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose
address is now in the program counter. Otherwise, the instruction immediately following the CPIJE
instruction is executed. In either case, the source pointer is incremented by one before the next
instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src dst
RA
3
12
C2
r
Ir
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 02H:
CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP ® R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
In this example, the working register R1 contains the value 02H, the working register R2 the value
03H, and the register 03 contains 02H. The statement "CPIJE R1,@R2,SKIP" compares the @R2
value 02H (00000010B) to 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is equal, the
relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by
SKIP. The source register (R2) is incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H.
Remember that the memory location addressed by the CPIJE instruction must be within the allowed
range of + 127 to – 128.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CPIJNE— Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal
CPIJNE
dst,src,RA
Operation:
If dst–src ¡ "0", PC ¬ PC + RA
Ir ¬ Ir + 1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is not "0",
the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose
address is now in the program counter. Otherwise the instruction following the CPIJNE instruction is
executed. In either case the source pointer is incremented by one before the next instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src dst
RA
3
12
D2
r
Ir
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 04H:
CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP ® R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
The working register R1 contains the value 02H, the working register R2 (the source pointer) the
value 03H, and the general register 03 the value 04H. The statement "CPIJNE R1,@R2,SKIP"
subtracts 04H (00000100B) from 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is non-
equal, the relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location
pointed to by SKIP. The source pointer register (R2) is also incremented by one, leaving a value of
04H.
Remember that the memory location addressed by the CPIJNE instruction must be within the
allowed range of + 127 to – 128.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
DA— Decimal Adjust
DA
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ DA dst
The destination operand is adjusted to form two 4-bit BCD digits following an addition or subtraction
operation. For addition (ADD, ADC) or subtraction (SUB, SBC), the following table indicates the
operation performed (The operation is undefined if the destination operand is not the result of a valid
addition or subtraction of BCD digits):
Instruction
Carry
Before DA
Bits 4–7
Value (Hex)
H Flag
Before DA
Bits 0–3
Value (Hex)
Number Added
to Byte
Carry
After DA
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0–9
0–8
0–9
A–F
9–F
A–F
0–2
0–2
0–3
0–9
0–8
7–F
6–F
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0–9
A–F
0–3
0–9
A–F
0–3
0–9
A–F
0–3
0–9
6–F
0–9
6–F
00
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
06
06
ADD
ADC
60
66
66
60
66
66
00 = – 00
FA = – 06
A0 = – 60
9A = – 66
SUB
SBC
Flags:
C: Set if there was a carry from the most significant bit; cleared otherwise (see table).
Z: Set if result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
40
41
R
IR
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DA— Decimal Adjust
DA
(Continued)
Example:
Given: The working register R0 contains the value 15 (BCD), the working register R1 contains 27
(BCD), and the address 27H contains 46 (BCD):
ADD
DA
R1,R0
R1
;
;
C ¬ "0", H ¬ "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = C, R1 ¬ 3CH
R1 ¬ 3CH + 06
If an addition is performed using the BCD values 15 and 27, the result should be 42. The sum is
incorrect, however, when the binary representations are added in the destination location using
the standard binary arithmetic:
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
15
27
+ 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
=
3CH
The DA instruction adjusts this result so that the correct BCD representation is obtained:
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
+ 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
=
42
Assuming the same values given above, the statements
SUB
DA
27H,R0
@R1
;
;
C ¬ "0", H ¬ "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, bits 0–3 = 1
@R1 ¬ 31–0
leave the value 31 (BCD) in the address 27H (@R1).
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
DEC— Decrement
DEC
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst–1
The contents of the destination operand are decremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
00
01
R
IR
Examples:
Given: R1 = 03H and register 03H = 10H:
DEC
DEC
R1
@R1
®
®
R1 = 02H
Register 03H = 0FH
In the first example, if the working register R1 contains the value 03H, the statement "DEC R1"
decrements the hexadecimal value by one, leaving the value 02H. In the second example, the
statement "DEC @R1" decrements the value 10H contained in the destination register 03H by one,
leaving the value 0FH.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DECW — Decrement Word
DECW
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – 1
The contents of the destination location (which must be an even address) and the operand
following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is decremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
8
8
80
81
RR
IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 12H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 30H, register 30H = 0FH, and register 31H = 21H:
DECW
DECW
RR0
@R2
®
®
R0 = 12H, R1 = 33H
Register 30H = 0FH, register 31H = 20H
In the first example, the destination register R0 contains the value 12H and the register R1 the value
34H. The statement "DECW RR0" addresses R0 and the following operand R1 as a 16-bit word and
decrements the value of R1 by one, leaving the value 33H.
NOTE: A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero flag (FLAGS.6) result together with a DECW instruction.
To avoid this problem, it is recommended to use DECW as shown in the following example.
LOOP
LD
DECW
R2,R1
RR0
OR
R2,R0
JR
NZ,LOOP
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
DI — Disable Interrupts
DI
Operation:
SYM (0) ¬ 0
Bit zero of the system mode control register, SYM.0, is cleared to "0", globally disabling all interrupt
processing. Interrupt requests will continue to set their respective interrupt pending bits, but the
CPU will not service them while interrupt processing is disabled.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
8F
Example:
Given: SYM = 01H:
DI
If the value of the SYM register is 01H, the statement "DI" leaves the new value 00H in the register
and clears SYM.0 to "0", disabling interrupt processing.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DIV— Divide (Unsigned)
DIV
dst,src
Operation:
dst ÷ src
dst (UPPER) ¬ REMAINDER
dst (LOWER) ¬ QUOTIENT
The destination operand (16 bits) is divided by the source operand (8 bits). The quotient (8 bits) is
stored in the lower half of the destination. The remainder (8 bits) is stored in the upper half of the
destination. When the quotient is ³ 28, the numbers stored in the upper and lower halves of the
destination for quotient and remainder are incorrect. Both operands are treated as unsigned
integers.
Flags:
C: Set if the V flag is set and the quotient is between 28 and 29 –1; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the divisor or the quotient = "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if MSB of the quotient = "1"; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if the quotient is ³ 28 or if the divisor = "0"; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
RR
RR
RR
src
opc
src
dst
3
26/10 *
26/10 *
26/10 *
94
95
96
R
IR
IM
* Execution takes 10 cycles if the divide-by-zero
is attempted, otherwise, it takes 26 cycles.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 10H, R1 = 03H, R2 = 40H, register 40H = 80H:
DIV RR0,R2
DIV RR0,@R2
DIV RR0,#20H
®
®
®
R0 = 03H, R1 = 40H
R0 = 03H, R1 = 20H
R0 = 03H, R1 = 80H
In the first example, the destination working register pair RR0 contains the values 10H (R0) and 03H
(R1), and the register R2 contains the value 40H. The statement "DIV RR0,R2" divides the 16-bit
RR0 value by the 8-bit value of the R2 (source) register. After the DIV instruction, R0 contains the
value 03H and R1 contains 40H. The 8-bit remainder is stored in the upper half of the destination
register RR0 (R0) and the quotient in the lower half (R1).
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
DJNZ— Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero
DJNZ
r,dst
Operation:
r ¬ r – 1
If r ¹ 0, PC ¬ PC + dst
The working register being used as a counter is decremented. If the contents of the register are not
logic zero after decrementing, the relative address is added to the program counter and control
passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC. The range of the relative address is +
127 to – 128, and the original value of the PC is taken to be the address of the instruction byte
following the DJNZ statement.
NOTE:
In case of using DJNZ instruction, the working register being used as a counter should be set at
the one of location 0C0H to 0CFH with SRP, SRP0 or SRP1 instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
r | opc
dst
2
8 (jump taken)
8 (no jump)
rA
RA
r = 0 to F
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H and LOOP is the label of a relative address:
SRP
#0C0H
DJNZ
R1,LOOP
DJNZ is typically used to control a "loop" of instructions. In many cases, a label is used as the
destination operand instead of a numeric relative address value. In the example, the working register
R1 contains the value 02H, and LOOP is the label for a relative address.
The statement "DJNZ R1, LOOP" decrements the register R1 by one, leaving the value 01H.
Because the contents of R1 after the decrement are non-zero, the jump is taken to the relative
address specified by the LOOP label.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
EI — Enable Interrupts
EI
Operation:
SYM (0) ¬ 1
The EI instruction sets bit zero of the system mode register, SYM.0 to "1". This allows interrupts to
be serviced as they occur (assuming they have the highest priority). If an interrupt's pending bit was
set while interrupt processing was disabled (by executing a DI instruction), it will be serviced when
the EI instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
9F
Example:
Given: SYM = 00H:
EI
If the SYM register contains the value 00H, that is, if interrupts are currently disabled, the statement
"EI" sets the SYM register to 01H, enabling all interrupts. (SYM.0 is the enable bit for global
interrupt processing.)
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
ENTER— Enter
ENTER
Operation:
SP ¬ SP – 2
@SP ¬ IP
IP ¬ PC
PC ¬ @IP
IP ¬ IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The contents of the
instruction pointer are pushed to the stack. The program counter (PC) value is then written to the
instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded
into the PC, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
14
1F
Example:
The diagram below shows an example of how to use an ENTER statement.
Before After
Address
IP 0050
Data
Address
IP 0043
Data
Address
Data
1F
Address H 01
Address L 10
Address H
Address
Data
1F
Address H 01
Address L 10
Address H
PC 0040
0022
PC 0110
0020
40
41
42
43
40
41
42
43
Enter
Enter
110
Routine
Memory
20 IPH
21 IPL 50
22 Data
00
Memory
22 Data
Stack
Stack
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
EXIT — Exit
EXIT
Operation:
IP
¬
@SP
SP ¬ SP + 2
PC ¬ @IP
IP
¬
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The stack value is popped
and loaded into the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the
instruction pointer is then loaded into the program counter, and the instruction pointer is
incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
16
2F
Example:
The diagram below shows an example of how to use an EXIT statement.
Before After
Address
IP 0050
Data
Address
IP 0043
Data
Address
Data
Address
60
Data
PC 0040
0020
PC 0110
0022
50 PCL old 60
51
Main
PCH
00
140
Exit
20 IPH
00
21 IPL 50
22 Data
Memory
Memory
22 Data
Stack
Stack
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
IDLE — Idle Operation
IDLE
Operation:
(See description)
The IDLE instruction stops the CPU clock while allowing the system clock oscillation to continue.
Idle mode can be released by an interrupt request (IRQ) or an external reset operation.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
1
4
6F
–
–
Example:
The instruction IDLE stops the CPU clock but it does not stop the system clock.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INC— Increment
INC
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + 1
The contents of the destination operand are incremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
dst | opc
1
4
rE
r
r = 0 to F
opc
dst
2
4
4
20
21
R
IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 1BH, register 00H = 0CH, and register 1BH = 0FH:
INC R0
INC 00H
INC @R0
®
®
®
R0 = 1CH
Register 00H = 0DH
R0 = 1BH, register 01H = 10H
In the first example, if the destination working register R0 contains the value 1BH, the statement
"INC R0" leaves the value 1CH in that same register.
The second example shows the effect an INC instruction has on the register at the location 00H,
assuming that it contains the value 0CH.
In the third example, INC is used in Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the value of
the register 1BH from 0FH to 10H.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
INCW — Increment Word
INCW
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ dst + 1
The contents of the destination (which must be an even address) and the byte following that
location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is incremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
8
8
A0
A1
RR
IR
Examples:
Given: R0 = 1AH, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 0FH, and register 03H = 0FFH:
INCW
INCW
RR0
@R1
®
®
R0 = 1AH, R1 = 03H
Register 02H = 10H, register 03H = 00H
In the first example, the working register pair RR0 contains the value 1AH in the register R0 and 02H
in the register R1. The statement "INCW RR0" increments the 16-bit destination by one, leaving the
value 03H in the register R1. In the second example, the statement "INCW @R1" uses Indirect
Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the contents of the general register 03H from 0FFH to
00H and the register 02H from 0FH to 10H.
NOTE:
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero (Z) flag (FLAGS.6) result together with an
INCW instruction. To avoid this problem, it is recommended to use the INCW instruction as shown
in the following example:
LOOP:
INCW
LD
RR0
R2,R1
R2,R0
NZ,LOOP
OR
JR
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
IRET — Interrupt Return
IRET
IRET (Normal)
RET (Fast)
Operation:
FLAGS ¬ @SP
SP ¬ SP + 1
PC ¬ @SP
PC « IP
FLAGS ¬ FLAGS'
FIS ¬ 0
SP ¬ SP + 2
SYM(0) ¬
1
This instruction is used at the end of an interrupt service routine. It restores the flag register and the
program counter. It also re-enables global interrupts. A "normal IRET" is executed only if the fast
interrupt status bit (FIS, bit one of the FLAGS register, 0D5H) is cleared (= "0"). If a fast interrupt
occurred, IRET clears the FIS bit that was set at the beginning of the service routine.
Flags:
All flags are restored to their original settings (that is, the settings before the interrupt occurred).
Format:
IRET
(Normal)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
12
BF
IRET
(Fast)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
6
BF
Example:
In the figure below, the instruction pointer is initially loaded with 100H in the main program before
interrupt are enabled. When an interrupt occurs, the program counter and the instruction pointer
are swapped. This causes the PC to jump to the address 100H and the IP to keep the return
address. The last instruction in the service routine is normally a jump to IRET at the address
FFH.
This loads the instruction pointer with 100H "again" and causes the program counter to jump
back to the main program. Now, the next interrupt can occur and the IP is still correct at 100H.
0H
FFH
IRET
100H
Interrupt
Service
Routine
JP to FFH
FFFFH
NOTE:
In the fast interrupt example above, if the last instruction is not a jump to IRET, you must pay
attention to the order of the last tow instruction. The IRET cannot be immediately proceeded by an
instruction which clears the interrupt status (as with a reset of the IPR register).
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
JP— Jump
JP
cc,dst (Conditional)
dst (Unconditional)
If cc is true, PC ¬ dst
JP
Operation:
The conditional JUMP instruction transfers program control to the destination address if the
condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, otherwise, the instruction following the JP
instruction is executed. The unconditional JP simply replaces the contents of the PC with the
contents of the specified register pair. Control then passes to the statement addressed by the PC.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
(1)
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
(2)
cc | opc
dst
3
8
ccD
DA
cc = 0 to F
opc
dst
2
8
30
IRR
NOTES:
1.
2.
The 3-byte format is used for a conditional jump and the 2-byte format for an unconditional jump.
In the first byte of the 3-byte instruction format (conditional jump), the condition code and the
OPCODE are both four bits.
Examples:
Given: The carry flag (C) = "1", register 00 = 01H, and register 01 = 20H:Secs
JP C,LABEL_W
JP @00H
®
®
LABEL_W = 1000H, PC = 1000H
PC = 0120H
The first example shows a conditional JP. Assuming that the carry flag is set to "1", the statement
"JP C,LABEL_W" replaces the contents of the PC with the value 1000H and transfers control to
that location. Had the carry flag not been set, control would then have passed to the statement
immediately following the JP instruction.
The second example shows an unconditional JP. The statement "JP @00" replaces the contents of
the PC with the contents of the register pair 00H and 01H, leaving the value 0120H.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
JR— Jump Relative
JR
cc,dst
Operation:
If cc is true, PC ¬ PC + dst
If the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, the relative address is added to the
program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program counter,
otherwise, the instruction following the JR instruction is executed. (See the list of condition codes at
the beginning of this chapter).
The range of the relative address is +127, –128, and the original value of the program counter is
taken to be the address of the first instruction byte following the JR statement.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
(note)
cc | opc
dst
2
6
ccB
RA
cc = 0 to F
NOTE: In the first byte of the two-byte instruction format, the condition code and the opcode are each four
bits in length.
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "1" and LABEL_X = 1FF7H:
JR C,LABEL_X
®
PC = 1FF7H
If the carry flag is set (that is, if the condition code is “true”), the statement "JR C,LABEL_X" will
pass control to the statement whose address is currently in the program counter. Otherwise, the
program instruction following the JR will be executed.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
LD— Load
LD
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
The contents of the source are loaded into the destination. The source's contents are unaffected.
No flags are affected.
Flags:
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
IM
R
dst | opc
src | opc
opc
src
dst
2
4
4
rC
r8
r
r
2
2
3
3
4
r9
R
r
r = 0 to F
dst | src
4
4
C7
D7
r
lr
r
Ir
opc
src
dst
src
6
6
E4
E5
R
R
R
IR
opc
dst
6
6
E6
D6
R
IM
IM
IR
opc
opc
opc
src
dst
x
3
3
3
6
6
6
F5
87
97
IR
r
R
x [r]
r
dst | src
src | dst
x
x [r]
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
LD— Load
LD
(Continued)
Examples:
Given: R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H,
register 02H = 02H, LOOP = 30H, and register 3AH = 0FFH:
LD R0,#10H
LD R0,01H
LD 01H,R0
LD R1,@R0
LD @R0,R1
LD 00H,01H
LD 02H,@00H
LD 00H,#0AH
LD @00H,#10H®
LD @00H,02H
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
R0 = 10H
R0 = 20H, register 01H = 20H
Register 01H = 01H, R0 = 01H
R1 = 20H, R0 = 01H
R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, register 01H = 0AH
Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 20H
Register 02H = 20H, register 00H = 01H
Register 00H = 0AH
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 10H
®
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 02,
register 02H = 02H
LD R0,#LOOP[R1]
LD #LOOP[R0],R1
®
®
R0 = 0FFH, R1 = 0AH
Register 31H = 0AH, R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
LDB— Load Bit
LDB
dst,src.b
dst.b,src
LDB
Operation:
dst(0) ¬ src(b)
or
dst(b) ¬ src(0)
The specified bit of the source is loaded into bit zero (LSB) of the destination, or bit zero of the
source is loaded into the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are affected.
The source is unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
dst | b | 0
src | b | 1
src
dst
3
6
47
r0
Rb
3
6
47
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination (or the source) address is four bits,
the bit address "b" is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 06H and general register 00H = 05H:
LDB
LDB
R0,00H.2
00H.0,R0
®
®
R0 = 07H, register 00H = 05H
R0 = 06H, register 00H = 04H
In the first example, the destination working register R0 contains the value 06H and the source
general register 00H the value 05H. The statement "LD R0,00H.2" loads the bit two value of the 00H
register into bit zero of the R0 register, leaving the value 07H in the register R0.
In the second example, 00H is the destination register. The statement "LD 00H.0,R0" loads bit zero
of the register R0 to the specified bit (bit zero) of the destination register, leaving 04H in the general
register 00H.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
LDC/LDE — Load Memory
LDC
LDE
dst,src
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
This instruction loads a byte from program or data memory into a working register or vice-versa. The
source values are unaffected. LDC refers to program memory and LDE to data memory. The
assembler makes "Irr" or "rr" values an even number for program memory and an odd number for
data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
opc
opc
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src | dst
dst | src
src | dst
dst | src
2
2
3
3
4
10
10
12
12
14
C3
D3
E7
F7
A7
r
Irr
Irr
r
XS
XS
XL
r
XS [rr]
r
XS [rr]
r
XL
XL [rr]
L
H
6.
7.
8.
9.
opc
opc
opc
opc
opc
src | dst
dst | 0000
src | 0000
dst | 0001
src | 0001
XL
XL
4
4
4
4
4
14
14
14
14
14
B7
A7
B7
A7
B7
XL [rr]
r
DA
r
L
H
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
DA
r
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
DA
r
DA
r
10.
DA
NOTES:
1. The source (src) or the working register pair [rr] for formats 5 and 6 cannot use the register pair 0–1.
2. For the formats 3 and 4, the destination "XS [rr]" and the source address "XS [rr]" are both one byte.
3. For the formats 5 and 6, the destination "XL [rr] and the source address "XL [rr]" are both two bytes.
4. The DA and the r source values for the formats 7 and 8 are used to address program memory. The second set of
values, used in the formats 9 and 10, are used to address data memory.
5. LDE instruction can be used to read/write the data of 64-Kbyte data memory.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
LDC/LDE — Load Memory
LDC/LDE
(Continued)
Examples:
Given: R0 = 11H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H; Program memory locations
0103H = 4FH, 0104H = 1A, 0105H = 6DH, and 1104H = 88H.
External data memory locations
0103H = 5FH, 0104H = 2AH, 0105H = 7DH, and 1104H = 98H:
LDC
R0,@RR2
;
;
;
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 0104H;
R0 = 1AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location
0104H;
LDE
R0,@RR2
;
;
;
;
R0 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location 0104H (RR2); R0, R2, R3 ® no change
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data
memory
LDC
LDE
@RR2,R0
@RR2,R0
;
;
;
;
location 0104H (RR2); R0, R2, R3 ® no change
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 0105H
(01H + RR2); R0 = 6DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location
0105H
LDC
LDE
R0,#01H[RR2]
R0,#01H[RR2]
;
;
(01H + RR2); R0 = 7DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location
0105H (01H + 0104H)
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data
memory
LDC
LDE
#01H[RR2],R0
#01H[RR2],R0
;
;
;
;
;
;
location 0105H (01H + 0104H)
LDC
LDE
R0,#1000H[RR2]
R0,#1000H[RR2]
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 1104H
(1000H + 0104H); R0 = 88H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location
1104H
;
;
;
;
(1000H + 0104H); R0 = 98H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
R0 ¬ contents of program memory location 1104H
R0 = 88H
R0 ¬ contents of external data memory location
1104H;
LDC
LDE
R0,1104H
R0,1104H
;
;
R0 = 98H
LDC
LDE
1105H,R0
1105H,R0
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location
1105H; (1105H) ¬ 11H
11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data
memory
;
;
;
location 1105H; (1105H) ¬ 11H
NOTE:
The LDC and the LDE instructions are not supported by masked ROM type devices.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
LDCD/LDED— Load Memory and Decrement
LDCD
dst,src
dst,src
LDED
Operation:
dst ¬ src
rr ¬ rr – 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory
to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The
contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is then
decremented. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCD refers to program memory and LDED refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes "Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | src
2
10
E2
r
Irr
Examples:
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory location 1033H = 0CDH, and
external data memory location 1033H = 0DDH:
LDCD
R8,@RR6
;
0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is
loaded
;
;
;
into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one;
R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H (RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is
loaded
LDED
R8,@RR6
;
;
into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one
(RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1);
R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H
NOTE:
LDED instruction can be used to read/write the data of 64-Kbyte data memory.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCI/LDEI — Load Memory and Increment
LDCI
dst,src
dst,src
LDEI
Operation:
dst ¬ src
rr ¬ rr + 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data memory
to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair. The
contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory address is then
incremented automatically. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCI refers to program memory and LDEI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes
"Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | src
2
10
E3
r
Irr
Examples:
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory locations 1033H = 0CDH and
1034H = 0C5H; external data memory locations 1033H = 0DDH and 1034H = 0D5H:
LDCI
R8,@RR6
;
;
0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is
loaded
into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one
(RR6 ¬ RR6 + 1);
;
;
R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is
loaded
LDEI
R8,@RR6
;
;
into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one
(RR6 ¬ RR6 + 1);
R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
NOTE:
LDEI instruction can be used to read/write the data of 64-Kbyte data memory.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
LDCPD/LDEPD— Load Memory with Pre-Decrement
LDCPD
dst,src
dst,src
LDEPD
Operation:
rr ¬ rr – 1
dst ¬ src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory to the register
file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
decremented. The contents of the source location are then loaded into the destination location. The
contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPD refers to program memory and LDEPD refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes "Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for external data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src | dst
2
14
F2
Irr
r
Examples:
Given: R0 = 77H, R6 = 30H, and R7 = 00H:
LDCPD
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
77H (the contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location 2FFFH (3000H – 1H);
R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
(RR6 ¬ RR6 – 1)
77H (the contents of R0) is loaded into external data
memory
LDEPD
@RR6,R0
;
location 2FFFH (3000H – 1H);
NOTE:
LDEPD instruction can be used to read/write the data of 64-Kbyte data memory.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
LDCPI/LDEPI — Load Memory with Pre-Increment
LDCPI
dst,src
dst,src
LDEPI
Operation:
rr ¬ rr + 1
dst ¬ src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory to the register
file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
incremented. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The
contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPI refers to program memory and LDEPI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes
"Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src | dst
2
14
F3
Irr
r
Examples:
Given: R0 = 7FH, R6 = 21H, and R7 = 0FFH:
LDCPI
@RR6,R0
;
;
;
;
;
;
(RR6 ¬ bRR6 + 1)
7FH (the contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
location 2200H (21FFH + 1H);
R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
(RR6 ¬ bRR6 + 1)
7FH (the contents of R0) is loaded into external data
memory
LDEPI
@RR6,R0
;
;
location 2200H (21FFH + 1H);
R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
NOTE:
LDEPI instruction can be used to read/write the data of 64-Kbyte data memory.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
LDW — Load Word
LDW
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
The contents of the source (a word) are loaded into the destination. The contents of the source
are unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
src
dst
dst
3
8
8
C4
C5
RR
RR
RR
IR
src
4
8
C6
RR
IML
Examples:
Given: R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH, R6 = 05H, R7 = 02H, register 00H = 1AH, register 01H = 02H,
register 02H = 03H,and register 03H = 0FH
LDW
LDW
RR6,RR4
00H,02H
®
®
R6 = 06H, R7 = 1CH, R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH
Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 0FH,
register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0FH
R2 = 03H, R3 = 0FH,
Register 04H = 03H, register 05H = 0FH
R6 = 12H, R7 = 34H
LDW
LDW
LDW
LDW
RR2,@R7
04H,@01H
RR6,#1234H
®
®
®
02H,#0FEDH ®
Register 02H = 0FH, register 03H = 0EDH
In the second example, please note that the statement "LDW 00H,02H" loads the contents of the
source word 02H and 03H into the destination word 00H and 01H. This leaves the value 03H in the
general register 00H and the value 0FH in the register 01H.
Other examples show how to use the LDW instruction with various addressing modes and formats.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
MULT — Multiply (Unsigned)
MULT
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst ´ src
The 8-bit destination operand (the even numbered register of the register pair) is multiplied by the
source operand (8 bits) and the product (16 bits) is stored in the register pair specified by the
destination address. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers.
Flags:
C: Set if the result is > 255; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if MSB of the result is a "1"; cleared otherwise.
V: Cleared.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
RR
RR
RR
src
opc
src
dst
3
22
22
22
84
85
86
R
IR
IM
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 20H, register 01H = 03H, register 02H = 09H, register 03H = 06H:
MULT
00H, 02H
®
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 20H,
register 02H = 09H
MULT
MULT
00H, @01H
00H, #30H
®
®
Register 00H = 00H, register 01H = 0C0H
Register 00H = 06H, register 01H = 00H
In the first example, the statement "MULT 00H,02H" multiplies the 8-bit destination operand (in the
register 00H of the register pair 00H, 01H) by the source register 02H operand (09H).
The 16-bit product, 0120H, is stored in the register pair 00H, 01H.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
NEXT — Next
NEXT
Operation:
PC ¬ @IP
IP ¬ IP + 2
The NEXT instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The program memory
word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the program counter. The instruction
pointer is then incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
10
0F
Example:
The following diagram shows an example of how to use the NEXT instruction.
Before
After
Data
Address
1P
Data
Address
1P
0043
0120
0045
0130
Address
Data
Address
43 Address H
Data
PC
43 Address H 01
PC
44 Address L 30
45 Address H
44 Address L
45 Address H
120 Next
Memory
130 Routine
Memory
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
NOP — No Operation
NOP
Operation:
No action is performed when the CPU executes this instruction. Typically, one or more NOPs are
executed in sequence in order to affect a timing delay of variable duration.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
FF
Example:
When the instruction NOP is executed in a program, no operation occurs. Instead, there happens
a delay in instruction execution time which is of approximately one machine cycle per each NOP
instruction encountered.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
OR— Logical OR
OR
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst OR src
The source operand is logically ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. The OR operation results in a "1" being
stored whenever either of the corresponding bits in the two operands is a "1", otherwise, a "0" is
stored.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
42
43
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
44
45
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
46
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 15H, R1 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 37H,
and register 08H = 8AH
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
®
R0 = 3FH, R1 = 2AH
R0,@R2
00H,01H
01H,@00H
00H,#02H
R0 = 37H, R2 = 01H, register 01H = 37H
Register 00H = 3FH, register 01H = 37H
Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 0BFH
Register 00H = 0AH
In the first example, if the working register R0 contains the value 15H and the register R1 the value
2AH, the statement "OR R0,R1" logical-ORs the R0 and R1 register contents and stores the result
(3FH) in the destination register R0.
Other examples show the use of the logical OR instruction with various addressing modes and
formats.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
POP — Pop from Stack
POP
dst
Operation:
dst ¬ @SP
SP ¬ SP + 1
The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are loaded into the destination.
The stack pointer is then incremented by one.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
8
8
50
51
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 1BH, SPH (0D8H) = 00H, SPL (0D9H) = 0FBH,
and stack register 0FBH = 55H:
POP
POP
00H
@00H
®
®
Register 00H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
Register 00H = 01H, register 01H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
In the first example, the general register 00H contains the value 01H. The statement "POP 00H"
loads the contents of the location 00FBH (55H) into the destination register 00H and then
increments the stack pointer by one. The register 00H then contains the value 55H and the SP
points to the location 00FCH.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
POPUD— Pop User Stack (Decrementing)
POPUD
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
IR ¬ IR – 1
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file
location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack pointer
is then decremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src
dst
3
8
92
R
IR
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 42H (user stack pointer register), register 42H = 6FH, and
register 02H = 70H:
POPUD
02H,@00H
®
6FH
Register 00H = 41H, register 02H = 6FH, register 42H =
02H If the general register 00H contains the value 42H and the register 42H the value 6FH, the
statement "POPUD 02H,@00H" loads the contents of the register 42H into the destination register.
The user stack pointer is then decremented by one, leaving the value 41H.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
POPUI — Pop User Stack (Incrementing)
POPUI
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ src
IR ¬ IR + 1
The POPUI instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the
register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user
stack pointer is then incremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
src
dst
3
8
93
R
IR
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 01H and register 01H = 70H:
POPUI
02H,@00H
®
70H
Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 70H, register 02H =
If the general register 00H contains the value 01H and the register 01H the value 70H, the statement
"POPUI 02H,@00H" loads the value 70H into the destination general register 02H. The user stack
pointer (the register 00H) is then incremented by one, changing its value from 01H to 02H.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PUSH— Push to Stack
PUSH
src
Operation:
SP ¬ SP – 1
@SP ¬ src
A PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer value and loads the contents of the source (src)
into the location addressed by the decremented stack pointer. The operation then adds the new
value to the top of the stack.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
src
2
8 (internal clock)
8 (external clock)
70
R
8 (internal clock)
8 (external clock)
71
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, SPH = 00H, and SPL = 00H:
PUSH
PUSH
40H
®
®
Register 40H = 4FH, stack register 0FFH = 4FH,
SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, stack register
0FFH = 0AAH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
@40H
In the first example, if the stack pointer contains the value 0000H, and the general register 40H the
value 4FH, the statement "PUSH 40H" decrements the stack pointer from 0000 to 0FFFFH. It then
loads the contents of the register 40H into the location 0FFFFH and adds this new value to the top
of the stack.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
PUSHUD— Push User Stack (Decrementing)
PUSHUD
dst,src
Operation:
IR ¬ IR – 1
dst ¬ src
This instruction is used to address user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUD decrements the
user stack pointer and loads the contents of the source into the register addressed by the
decremented stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst
src
3
8
82
IR
R
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 02H = 1AH:
PUSHUD @00H,01H
®
Register 00H = 02H, register 01H = 05H,
register 02H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (the register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUD @00H,01H" decrements the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 02H.
The 01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the register addressed by the decremented user
stack pointer.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PUSHUI — Push User Stack (Incrementing)
PUSHUI
dst,src
Operation:
IR ¬ IR + 1
dst ¬ src
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUI increments the user
stack pointer and then loads the contents of the source into the register location addressed by the
incremented user stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst
src
3
8
83
IR
R
Example:
Given: Register 00H = 03H, register 01H = 05H, and register 04H = 2AH:
PUSHUI
@00H,01H
®
Register 00H = 04H, register 01H = 05H,
register 04H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (the register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUI @00H,01H" increments the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 04H. The 01H
register value, 05H, is then loaded into the location addressed by the incremented user stack
pointer.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
RCF — Reset Carry Flag
RCF
RCF
Operation:
C ¬ 0
The carry flag is cleared to logic zero, regardless of its previous value.
Flags:
C: Cleared to "0".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
CF
Example:
Given: C = "1" or "0":
The instruction RCF clears the carry flag (C) to logic zero.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RET — Return
RET
Operation:
PC ¬ @SP
SP ¬ SP + 2
The RET instruction is normally used to return to the previously executed procedure at the end of
the procedure entered by a CALL instruction. The contents of the location addressed by the stack
pointer are popped into the program counter. The next statement to be executed is the one that is
addressed by the new program counter value.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
10
AF
Example:
Given: SP = 00FCH, (SP) = 101AH, and PC = 1234:
RET PC = 101AH, SP = 00FEH
®
The RET instruction pops the contents of the stack pointer location 00FCH (10H) into the high byte
of the program counter. The stack pointer then pops the value in the location 00FEH (1AH) into the
PC's low byte and the instruction at the location 101AH is executed. The stack pointer now points
to the memory location 00FEH.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
RL — Rotate Left
RL
dst
Operation:
C ¬ dst (7)
dst (0) ¬ dst (7)
dst (n + 1) ¬ dst (n), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 is
moved to the bit zero (LSB) position and also replaces the carry flag, as shown in the figure below.
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
90
91
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H and register 02H = 17H:
RL
RL
00H
@01H
®
®
Register 00H = 55H, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if the general register 00H contains the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement
"RL 00H" rotates the 0AAH value left one bit position, leaving the new value 55H (01010101B) and
setting the carry (C) and the overflow (V) flags.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RLC— Rotate Left through Carry
RLC
dst
Operation:
dst (0) ¬ C
C ¬ dst (7)
dst (n + 1) ¬ dst (n), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand with the carry flag are rotated left one bit position. The initial
value of bit 7 replaces the carry flag (C), and the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit zero.
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination is changed during
the rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
10
11
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H, C = "0":
RLC
RLC
00H
@01H
®
®
Register 00H = 54H, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if the general register 00H has the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement
"RLC 00H" rotates 0AAH one bit position to the left. The initial value of bit 7 sets the carry flag and
the initial value of the C flag replaces bit zero of the register 00H, leaving the value 55H (01010101B).
The MSB of the register 00H resets the carry flag to "1" and sets the overflow flag.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
RR— Rotate Right
RR
dst
Operation:
C ¬ dst (0)
dst (7) ¬ dst (0)
dst (n) ¬ dst (n + 1), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit zero
(LSB) is moved to bit 7 (MSB) and also replaces the carry flag (C).
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination is changed during
the rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
E0
E1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 31H, register 01H = 02H, and register 02H = 17H:
RR
RR
00H
@01H
®
®
Register 00H = 98H, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 8BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if the general register 00H contains the value 31H (00110001B), the statement
"RR 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero is moved to bit 7,
leaving the new value 98H (10011000B) in the destination register. The initial bit zero also resets the
C flag to "1" and the sign flag and the overflow flag are also set to "1".
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RRC— Rotate Right through Carry
RRC
dst
Operation:
dst (7) ¬ C
C ¬ dst (0)
dst (n) ¬ dst (n + 1), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand and the carry flag are rotated right one bit position. The
initial value of bit zero (LSB) replaces the carry flag, and the initial value of the carry flag replaces
bit 7 (MSB).
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0" cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination is changed during
the rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
C0
C1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 55H, register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 17H, and C = "0":
RRC
RRC
00H
@01H
®
®
Register 00H = 2AH, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, register 02H = 0BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if the general register 00H contains the value 55H (01010101B), the statement
"RRC 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero ("1") replaces
the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag ("1") replaces bit 7. This leaves the new value 2AH
(00101010B) in the destination register 00H. The sign flag and the overflow flag are both cleared to
"0".
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
SB0— Select Bank 0
SB0
Operation:
BANK ¬ 0
The SB0 instruction clears the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic zero,
selecting the bank 0 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
4F
Example:
The statement SB0 clears FLAGS.0 to "0", selecting the bank 0 register addressing.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SB1— Select Bank 1
SB1
Operation:
BANK ¬ 1
The SB1 instruction sets the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic one,
selecting the bank 1 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file.
NOTE: Bank 1 is not implemented in some KS88-series microcontrollers.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
5F
Example:
The statement SB1 sets FLAGS.0 to “1”, selectin the bank 1 register addressing
(if bank 1 is implemented in the microcontrooler’s internla register file).
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
SBC— Subtract with Carry
SBC
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – src – c
The source operand, along with the current value of the carry flag, is subtracted from the destination
operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected.
Subtraction is performed by adding the two's-complement of the source operand to the destination
operand. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry ("borrow") from the
subtraction of the low-order operands to be subtracted from the subtraction of high-order operands.
Flags:
C: Set if a borrow occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite sign and the
sign of the result is the same as the sign of the source; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result
set otherwise, indicating a “borrow”
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
32
33
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
34
35
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
36
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C = "1", register 01H = 20H, register 02H = 03H,
and register 03H = 0AH:
SBC
SBC
SBC
SBC
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
R1 = 0CH, R2 = 03H
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
R1 = 05H, R2 = 03H, register 03H = 0AH
Register 01H = 1CH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 15H, register 02H = 03H,
register 03H = 0AH
SBC
01H,#8AH
®
Register 01H = 95H; C, S, and V = "1"
In the first example, if the working register R1 contains the value 10H and the register R2 the value
03H, the statement "SBC R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) and the C flag value ("1") from
the destination (10H) and then stores the result (0CH) in the register R1.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SCF — Set Carry Flag
SCF
Operation:
Flags:
C ¬ 1
The carry flag (C) is set to logic one, regardless of its previous value.
C: Set to "1".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4
DF
Example:
The statement SCF sets the carry flag to “1”.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
SRA— Shift Right Arithmetic
SRA
dst
Operation:
dst (7) ¬ dst (7)
C ¬ dst (0)
dst (n) ¬ dst (n + 1), n = 0–6
An arithmetic shift-right of one bit position is performed on the destination operand. Bit zero (the
LSB) replaces the carry flag. The value of bit 7 (the sign bit) is unchanged and is shifted into the bit
position 6.
7
6
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit shifted from the LSB position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
D0
D1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 9AH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0BCH, and C = "1":
SRA
SRA
00H
@02H
®
®
Register 00H = 0CD, C = "0"
Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0DEH, C = "0"
In the first example, if the general register 00H contains the value 9AH (10011010B), the statement
"SRA 00H" shifts the bit values in the register 00H right one bit position. Bit zero ("0") clears the C
flag and bit 7 ("1") is then shifted into the bit 6 position (bit 7 remains unchanged). This leaves the
value 0CDH (11001101B) in the destination register 00H.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SRP/SRP0/SRP1— Set Register Pointer
SRP
src
SRP0
SRP1
src
src
Operation:
If src (1) = 1 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (3–7) ¬
If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 1 then: RP1 (3–7) ¬
If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 0 then: RP0 (4–7) ¬
src (3–7)
src (3–7)
src (4–7),
0
RP0 (3)
RP1 (4–7) ¬
RP1 (3)
¬
src (4–7),
1
¬
The source data bits one and zero (LSB) determine whether to write one or both of the register
pointers, RP0 and RP1. Bits 3–7 of the selected register pointer are written unless both register
pointers are selected. RP0.3 is then cleared to logic zero and RP1.3 is set to logic one.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
opc
src
2
4
31
IM
Examples:
NOTE:
The statement SRP #40H sets the register pointer 0 (RP0) at the location 0D6H to 40H and the
register pointer 1 (RP1) at the location 0D7H to 48 H.
The statement "SRP0 #50H" would set RP0 to 50H, and the statement "SRP1 #68H" would set
RP1 to 68H.
Before execute the STOP instruction, You must set the STPCON register as “10100101b”.
Otherwise the STOP instruction will not execute.
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
STOP — Stop Operation
STOP
Operation:
The STOP instruction stops the both the CPU clock and system clock and causes the
microcontroller to enter Stop mode. During Stop mode, the contents of on-chip CPU registers,
peripheral registers, and I/O port control and data registers are retained. Stop mode can be released
by an external reset operation or by external interrupts. For the reset operation, the RESET pin
must be held to Low level until the required oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
1
4
7F
–
–
Example:
The statement STOP halts all microcontroller operations.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
SUB— Subtract
SUB
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst – src
The source operand is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's
complement of the source operand to the destination operand.
Flags:
C: Set if a "borrow" occurred; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite signs and the
sign of the result is of the same as the sign of the source operand; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the
result; set otherwise indicating a “borrow”.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
22
23
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
24
25
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
26
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, register 01H = 21H, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0AH:
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
R1,R2
®
®
®
®
®
®
R1 = 0FH, R2 = 03H
R1 = 08H, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 1EH, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 17H, register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 91H; C, S, and V = "1"
Register 01H = 0BCH; C and S = "1", V = "0"
R1,@R2
01H,02H
01H,@02H
01H,#90H
01H,#65H
In the first example, if he working register R1 contains the value 12H and if the register R2 contains
the value 03H, the statement "SUB R1,R2" subtracts the source value (03H) from the destination
value (12H) and stores the result (0FH) in the destination register R1.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
SWAP— Swap Nibbles
SWAP
dst
Operation:
dst (0 – 3) « dst (4 – 7)
The contents of the lower four bits and the upper four bits of the destination operand are swapped.
7
4 3
0
Flags:
C: Undefined.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
opc
dst
2
4
4
F0
F1
R
IR
Examples:
Given: Register 00H = 3EH, register 02H = 03H, and register 03H = 0A4H:
SWAP
SWAP
00H
@02H
®
®
Register 00H = 0E3H
Register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 4AH
In the first example, if the general register 00H contains the value 3EH (00111110B), the statement
"SWAP 00H" swaps the lower and the upper four bits (nibbles) in the 00H register, leaving the value
0E3H (11100011B).
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
TCM — Test Complement under Mask
TCM
dst,src
Operation:
(NOT dst) AND src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic one value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask).
The TCM statement complements the destination operand, which is then ANDed with the source
mask. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and the source
operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
62
63
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
64
65
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
66
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 12H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and
register 02H = 23H:
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "1"
R0,@R1
00H,01H
00H,@01H
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "1"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H,
register 02H = 23H, Z = "1"
TCM
00H,#34
®
Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "0"
In the first example, if the working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and the register
R1 the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TCM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register
for a "1" value. Because the mask value corresponds to the test bit, the Z flag is set to logic one and
can be tested to determine the result of the TCM operation.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
TM — Test under Mask
TM
dst,src
Operation:
dst AND src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic zero value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand (mask),
which is ANDed with the destination operand. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine
the result. The destination and the source operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
72
73
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
74
75
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
76
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and
register 02H = 23H:
TM
TM
TM
TM
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "0"
R0,@R1
00H,01H
00H,@01H
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H,
register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
TM
00H,#54H
®
Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "1"
In the first example, if the working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and the register
R1 the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TM R0,R1" tests bit one in the destination register
for a "0" value. Because the mask value does not match the test bit, the Z flag is cleared to logic
zero and can be tested to determine the result of the TM operation.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUCTION SET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
WFI — Wate for Interrupt
WFI
Operation:
The CPU is effectively halted before an interrupt occurs, except that DMA transfers can still take
place during this wait state. The WFI status can be released by an internal interrupt, including a
fast interrupt.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
opc
1
4n
3F
(n = 1, 2, 3, … )
Example:
The following sample program structure shows the sequence of operations that follow a "WFI"
statement:
Main program
.
.
.
EI
WFI
(Enable global interrupt)
(Wait for interrupt)
(Next instruction)
.
.
.
Interrupt occurs
Interrupt service routine
.
.
.
Clear interrupt flag
IRET
Service routine completed
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INSTRUCTION SET
XOR— Logical Exclusive OR
XOR
dst,src
Operation:
dst ¬ dst XOR src
The source operand is logically exclusive-ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored
in the destination. The exclusive-OR operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the
corresponding bits in the operands are different. Otherwise, a "0" bit is stored.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
opc
opc
dst | src
src
2
4
6
B2
B3
r
r
r
lr
dst
src
3
3
6
6
B4
B5
R
R
R
IR
dst
6
B6
R
IM
Examples:
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, register 00H = 2BH, register 01H = 02H, and
register 02H = 23H:
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
R0,R1
®
®
®
®
R0 = 0C5H, R1 = 02H
R0,@R1
00H,01H
00H,@01H
R0 = 0E4H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H
Register 00H = 29H, register 01H = 02H
Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 02H,
register 02H = 23H
XOR
00H,#54H
®
Register 00H = 7FH
In the first example, if the working register R0 contains the value 0C7H and if the register R1
contains the value 02H, the statement "XOR R0,R1" logically exclusive-ORs the R1 value with the
R0 value and stores the result (0C5H) in the destination register R0.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CLOCK CIRCUIT
7
CLOCK CIRCUIT
OVERVIEW
The clock frequency generated for the Main clock of S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 by an external crystal can range from
1 MHz to 12 MHz. The maximum CPU clock frequency is 12 MHz. The XIN and XOUT pins connect the external
oscillator or clock source to the on-chip clock circuit. Also the subsystem clock frequency for the Watch timer by an
external crystal can range from 30 kHz to 35 kHz. The XTIN and XTOUT pins connect the external oscillator or clock
source to the on-chip clock circuit. The sub-system oscillation pins, XTIN and XTOUT can be used for normal digital
I/O pins (P0.0, P0.1) if they are not used for oscillation pins.
SYSTEM CLOCK CIRCUIT
The system clock circuit has the following components:
— External crystal or ceramic resonator oscillation source (or an external clock source)
— Oscillator stop and wake-up functions
— Programmable frequency divider for the CPU clock (fxx divided by 1, 2, 8, or 16)
— System clock control register, CLKCON
— Oscillator control register, OSCCON and STOP control register, STPCON
C1
C2
XTIN/P0.0
S3C84E5
XIN
S3C84E5
S3C84E9
S3P84E9
S3C84E9
S3P84E9
XTOUT/P0.1
XOUT
32.768 kHz
Figure 7-2. Sub-System Oscillator Circuit
(Crystal Oscillator)
Figure 7-1. Main Oscillator Circuit
(Crystal or Ceramic Oscillator)
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
CLOCK STATUS DURING POWER-DOWN MODES
The two power-down modes, Stop mode and Idle mode, affect the system clock as follows:
— In Stop mode, the main oscillator is halted. Stop mode is released, and the oscillator is started, by a reset
operation or an external interrupt (with RC delay noise filter), and can be released by internal interrupt too when
the sub-system oscillator is running and watch timer is operating with sub-system clock.
— In Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated to the CPU, but not to interrupt structure, timers and timer/
counters. Idle mode is released by a reset or by an external or internal interrupt.
Stop Release
INT
Driving Ability
OSCCON.4
Main-System
Oscillator
Circuit
Sub-system
Oscillator
Circuit
fX
fXT
Watch Timer
Selector 1
fXX
Stop
OSCCON.3
OSCCON.0
Stop
OSCCON.2
1/8-1/4096
Basic Timer
Timer/Counter
STOP OSC
inst.
Frequency
Dividing
Circuit
Watch Timer (fxx/256)
STPCON
UART
A/D Converter
1/1 1/2 1/8 1/16
System Clock
CLKCON.4-.3
Selector 2
CPU Clock
IDLE Instruction
Figure 7-3. System Clock Circuit Diagram
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 (REV.0)
CLOCK CIRCUIT
SYSTEM CLOCK CONTROL REGISTER (CLKCON)
The system clock control register, CLKCON, is located in set 1, address D4H. It is read/write addressable and has
the following functions:
— Oscillator frequency divide-by value
After the main oscillator is activated, and the fxx/16 (the slowest clock speed) is selected as the CPU clock. If
necessary, you can then increase the CPU clock speed fxx/8, fxx/2, or fxx/1.
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
D4H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used (must keep always 0)
Not used (must keep always 0)
Divide-by selection bits for
CPU clock frequency:
00 = fXX /16
01 = fXX /8
10 = fXX /2
11 = fXX /1 (non-divided)
NOTE:
The fxx can be generated by both main-system and
sub-system oscillator therefore while main-system
stops peripherals can be operated by sub-system.
Figure 7-4. System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLOCK CIRCUIT
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
FBH, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used (must keep always 0)
Not used (must keep always 0)
System clock selection bit:
0 = Main oscillator select
1 = Subsystem oscillator select
Subsystem oscillator driving
ability control bit:
0 = Strong driving ability
1 = Normal driving ability
Subsystem oscillator control bit:
0 = Subsystem oscillator RUN
1 = Subsystem oscillator STOP
Mainsystem oscillator control bit:
0 = Mainsystem oscillator RUN
1 = Mainsystem oscillator STOP
In strong mode the warm-up time is less than 100 ms.
NOTE:
When the CPU is operated with fxt (sub-oscillation clock), it is possible to use
the stop instruction but in this case before using stop instruction, you must select
fxx/128 for basic timer counter clock input.
Then the oscillation stabilization time is 62.5 ((1/32768) x 128 x 16) ms + 100 ms.
Here the warm-up time is from the time that the stop release signal activates to
the time that basic timer starts counting.
Figure 7-5. Oscillator Control Register (OSCCON)
STOP Control Register (STPCON)
E5H, Set 1,Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
STOP Control bits:
Other values = Disable STOP instruction
10100101 = Enable STOP instruction
Figure 7-6. STOP Control Register (STPCON)
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RESET and POWER-DOWN
8
RESET and POWER-DOWN
SYSTEM RESET
OVERVIEW
During a power-on Reset, the voltage at VDD goes to High level and the nRESET pin is forced to Low level. The
nRESET signal is input through a Schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This
procedure brings S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 into a known operating status.
To allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize, the nRESET pin must be held to Low level for a minimum
time interval after the power supply comes within tolerance. The minimum required oscillation stabilization time for a
reset operation is 1 millisecond.
Whenever a reset occurs during normal operation (that is, when both VDD and nRESET are High level), the nRESET
pin is forced Low and the Reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are then Reset to their
default hardware values
In summary, the following sequence of events occurs during a Reset operation:
— Interrupt is disabled.
— The watchdog function (basic timer) is enabled.
— Ports 0-4 are set to input mode with pull-up resistor, P0.0 and P0.1 are set to XTin and XTout respectively.
— Peripheral control and data registers are disabled and reset to their default hardware values.
— The program counter (PC) is loaded with the program reset address in the ROM, 0100H.
— When the programmed oscillation stabilization time interval has elapsed, the instruction stored in ROM location
0100H (and 0101H) is fetched and executed.
NORMAL MODE RESET OPERATION
In normal (masked ROM) mode, the TEST pin is tied to VSS. A reset enables access to the 32-Kbyte on-chip ROM.
NOTE
To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you make the appropriate settings to the
basic timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic
timer watchdog function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can
disable it by writing '1010B' to the upper nibble of BTCON.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
HARDWARE RESET VALUES
Table 8-1, 8-2, and 8-3 list the reset values for CPU and system registers, peripheral control registers, and peripheral
data registers following a reset operation. The following notation is used to represent reset values:
— A "1" or a "0" shows the reset bit value as logic one or logic zero, respectively.
— An "x" means that the bit value is undefined after a reset.
— A dash ("–") means that the bit is either not used or not mapped, but read 0 is the bit value.
Table 8-1. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Set 1 Register Values After RESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Dec
Bit Values After RESET
Hex
D0H
D1H
D2H
D3H
D4H
D5H
D6H
D7H
D8H
D9H
DAH
DBH
DCH
DDH
DEH
DFH
7
0
1
1
0
0
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
6
0
1
1
0
0
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
5
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
4
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
0
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
0
3
0
1
1
0
0
x
0
1
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
0
2
0
1
1
0
0
x
–
–
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
–
–
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
–
–
x
x
x
x
0
x
0
0
Timer B control register
TBCON
TBDATAH
TBDATAL
BTCON
CLKCON
FLAGS
RP0
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
Timer B data register (high byte)
Timer B data register (low byte)
Basic timer control register
Clock control register
System flags register
Register pointer 0
Register pointer 1
RP1
Stack pointer (high byte)
Stack pointer (low byte)
Instruction pointer (high byte)
Instruction pointer (low byte)
Interrupt request register
Interrupt mask register
System mode register
Register page pointer
SPH
SPL
IPH
IPL
IRQ
IMR
SYM
PP
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RESET and POWER-DOWN
Table 8-2. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Set 1, Bank 0 Register Values After RESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Dec
Bit Values After RESET
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
E5H
E6H
E7H
E8H
E9H
EAH
EBH
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
F0H
F1H
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F6H
F7H
F8H
F9H
FAH
FBH
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 data register
P0
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
Port 1 data register
P1
Port 2 data register
P2
Port 3 data register
P3
Port 4 data register
P4
STOP control register
STPCON
P0CONH
P0CONL
P1CONH
P1CONL
P2CONH
P2CONL
P2INT
Port 0 control register (high byte)
Port 0 control register (low byte)
Port 1 control register (high byte)
Port 1 control register (low byte)
Port 2 control register (high byte)
Port 2 control register (low byte)
Port 2 interrupt control register
Port 2 interrupt/pending register
Port 3 control register (high byte)
Port 3 control register (low byte)
Port 4 control register (high byte)
Port 4 control register (low byte)
Port 4 interrupt control register
Port 4 interrupt/pending register
UART pending register
P2INTPND
P3CONH
P3CONL
P4CONH
P4CONL
P4INT
P4INTPND
UARTPND
UDATA
UART data register
UART control register
UARTCON
ADCON
ADDATAH
ADDATAL
WTCON
OSCCON
A/D converter control register
A/D converter data register(high byte)
A/D converter data register(low byte)
Watch timer control register
Oscillator control register
Location FCH is factory use only.
Basic timer counter register
Interrupt priority register
BTCNT
Location FEH is not mapped.
IPR 255 FFH
253
FDH
0
0
x
0
x
0
x
0
x
0
x
0
x
0
x
x
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 8-3. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Set 1, Bank 1 Register Values After RESET
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address
Dec
Bit Values After RESET
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
E5H
E6H
E7H
E8H
E9H
EAH
EBH
ECH
EDH
EEH
EFH
7
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
6
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
5
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
4
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
3
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Timer A, 1 interrupt pending register
Timer A control register
TINTPND
TACON
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
Timer A data register
TADATA
Timer A counter register
TACNT
Timer 1(0) data register (high byte)
Timer 1(0) data register (low byte)
Timer 1(1) data register (high byte)
Timer 1(1) data register (low byte)
Timer 1(0) control register
T1DATAH0
T1DATAL0
T1DATAH1
T1DATAL1
T1CON0
Timer 1(1) control register
T1CON1
Timer 1(0) counter register (high byte)
Timer 1(0) counter register (low byte)
Timer 1(1) counter register (high byte)
Timer 1(1) counter register (low byte)
UART baud rate data register (high)
UART baud rate data register (low)
T1CNTH0
T1CNTL0
T1CNTH1
T1CNTL1
BRDATAH
BRDATAL
Location F0H - FFH are not mapped
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
RESET and POWER-DOWN
POWER-DOWN MODES
STOP MODE
Stop mode is invoked by the instruction STOP (opcode 7FH). In Stop mode, the operation of the CPU and all
peripherals is halted. That is, the on-chip main oscillator stops and the supply current is reduced to less than 3 µA
except for the current consumption of LVR (Low voltage Reset) circuit. All system functions stop when the clock
"freezes," but data stored in the internal register file is retained. Stop mode can be released in one of two ways: by a
reset or by interrupts.
NOTE
Do not use stop mode if you are using an external clock source because XIN input must be restricted
internally to VSS to reduce current leakage.
Using RESET to Release Stop Mode
Stop mode is released when the nRESET signal is released and returns to high level: all system and peripheral
control registers are reset to their default hardware values and the contents of all data registers are retained. A reset
operation automatically selects a slow clock (1/16) because CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 are cleared to '00B'. After
the programmed oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed, the CPU starts the system initialization routine by
fetching the program instruction stored in ROM location 0100H (and 0101H).
Using an External Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
External interrupts with an RC-delay noise filter circuit can be used to release Stop mode. Which interrupt you can
use to release Stop mode in a given situation depends on the microcontroller's current internal operating mode. The
external interrupts in the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 interrupt structure that can be used to release Stop mode are:
— External interrupts P2.0–P2.7 (INT0–INT7) and P4.0–P4.2 (INT8–INT10)
Please note the following conditions for Stop mode release:
— If you release Stop mode using an external interrupt, the current values in system and peripheral control
registers are unchanged.
— If you use an external interrupt for Stop mode release, you can also program the duration of the oscillation
stabilization interval. To do this, you must make the appropriate control and clock settings before entering Stop
mode.
— When the Stop mode is released by external interrupt, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 bit-pair setting remains
unchanged and the currently selected clock value is used.
— The external interrupt is serviced when the Stop mode release occurs. Following the IRET from the service
routine, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated Stop mode is executed.
Using an internal Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
Activate any enabled interrupt, causing stop mode to be released. Other things are same as using external
interrupt.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RESET and POWER-DOWN
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
How to Enter into Stop Mode
There are two steps to enter into Stop mode:
1. Handling OSCCON register.
2. Handling STPCON register then writing Stop instruction (keep the order).
IDLE MODE
Idle mode is invoked by the instruction IDLE (opcode 6FH). In idle mode, CPU operations are halted while some
peripherals remain active. During idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated away from the CPU, but all peripherals
timers remain active. Port pins retain the mode (input or output) they had at the time idle mode was entered.
There are two ways to release idle mode:
1. Execute a reset. All system and peripheral control registers are reset to their default values and the contents of
all data registers are retained. The reset automatically selects the slow clock fxx/16 because CLKCON.4 and
CLKCON.3 are cleared to ‘00B’. If interrupts are masked, a reset is the only way to release idle mode.
2. Activate any enabled interrupt, causing idle mode to be released. When you use an interrupt to release idle
mode, the CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3 register values remain unchanged, and the currently selected clock value
is used. The interrupt is then serviced. When the return-from-interrupt (IRET) occurs, the instruction immediately
following the one that initiated idle mode is executed.
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
9
I/O PORTS
OVERVIEW
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontroller has seven bit-programmable I/O ports, P0–P4. This gives a total of 36
I/O pins. Each port can be flexibly configured to meet application design requirements. The CPU accesses ports by
directly writing or reading port registers. No special I/O instructions are required.
Table 9-1 gives you a general overview of the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 I/O port functions.
Table 9-1. S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Port Configuration Overview
Port
Configuration Options
0
Bit programmable port; input or output mode selected by software; input or push-pull output. Software
assignable pull-up resistor.
Alternately, P0.0–P0.7 can be used as I/O for Timer A, Timer 1(0,1). P0.0 and P0.1 can alternately be
used for subsystem oscillator in/out mode selected by software
1
2
Bit programmable port; input or output mode selected by software; input or push-pull output. Software
assignable pull-up resistor.
Alternatively, P1.0–P1.5 can be used as Timer A, Timer 1(0), UART, Watch Timer Buzzer output
Bit programmable port; input or output mode selected by software; input or push-pull output. Software
assignable pull-up.
Alternately, P2.0–P2.7 can be used as inputs for external interrupts INT0–INT7. (with noise filters and
interrupt controller)
3
4
Bit programmable port; input or output mode selected by software; input or push-pull output. Software
assignable pull-up.
Alternately, P3.0–P3.7 can be used as analog inputs for A/D converter modules.
Bit programmable port; input or output mode selected by software; input or push-pull output. Software
assignable pull-up.
Alternatively, P4.0–P4.5 can be used as Timer B, inputs for external interrupts INT8–INT10. (with noise
filters and interrupt controller)
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PORT DATA REGISTERS
Table 9-2 gives you an overview of the register locations of all seven S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 I/O port data registers.
Data registers for ports 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 have the general format shown in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2. Port Data Register Summary
Register Name
Port 0 data register
Port 1 data register
Port 2 data register
Port 3 data register
Port 4 data register
Mnemonic
Decimal
224
Hex
E0H
E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H
Location
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
Set 1, Bank 0
225
226
227
228
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
PORT 0
Port 0 is an 8-bit I/O port that you can use two ways:
— General-purpose digital I/O
— Alternative function: TACAP, TACK, T1CAP0, T1OUT1, T1CK1, T1CAP1, XTIN, XTOUT
Port 0 is accessed directly by writing or reading the port 0 data register, P0 at location E0H in set 1, bank 0.
Port 0 Control Register (P0CONH/P0CONL)
Port 0 has two 8-bit control registers: P0CONH for P0.4–P0.7 and P0CONL for P0.0–P0.3. A reset clears the
P0CONH and P0CONL registers to “00H” and “0FH”, configuring all pins to input modes. You use control registers
settings to select input or output mode (push-pull) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 0 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 0 Control Register, High Byte (P0CONH)
E6H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P0.7/TACAP Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; TACAP input
0 1 = Input mode; TACAP input
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.5-.4] P0.6/TACK Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; TACK input
0 1 = Input mode; TACK input
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.3-.2] P0.5/T1CAP0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; T1CAP0 input
0 1 = Input mode; T1CAP0 input
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.1-.0] P0.4/T1OUT1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: T1OUT1 output
Figure 9-1. Port 0 High Byte Control Register (P0CONH)
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Port 0 Control Register, Low Byte (P0CONL)
E7H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="0FH"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P0.3/T1CK1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; T1CK1 input
0 1 = Input mode; T1CK1 input
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.5-.4] P0.2/T1CAP1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; T1CAP1 input
0 1 = Input mode; T1CAP1 input
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.3-.2] P0.1/XTout Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: Sub oscillator output (XTout)
[.1-.0] P0.0/XTin Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: Sub oscillator input (XTin)
Figure 9-2. Port 0 Low Byte Control Register (P0CONL)
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
PORT 1
Port 1 is a 6-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins that you can use two ways:
— General-purpose digital I/O
— Alternative function: TAOUT, T1OUT0, T1CK0, BZOUT, TXD, RXD
Port 1 is accessed directly by writing or reading the port 1 data register, P1 at location E1H in set 1, bank 0.
Port 1 Control Register (P1CONH, P1CONL)
Port 1 has two 6-bit control registers: P1CONH for P1.4–P1.5 and P1CONL for P1.0–P1.3. A reset clears the
P1CONH and P1CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input modes. You use control registers settings to
select input or output mode (push-pull) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 1 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 1 Control Register, High Byte (P1CONH)
E8H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.4] Not used (must keep always 0)
[.3-.2] P1.5/TXD Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: TXD output
[.1-.0] P1.4/RXD Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; RXD input
0 1 = Input mode; RXD input
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: RXD output
Figure 9-3. Port 1 High-Byte Control Register (P1CONH)
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Port 1 Control Register, Low Byte (P1CONL)
E9H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00H"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P1.3/BZOUT Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: BZOUT output
[.5-.4] P1.2/T1OUT0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: T1OUT0 output
[.3-.2] P1.1/T1CK0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; T1CK0 input
0 1 = Input mode; T1CK0 input
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.1-.0] P1.0/TAOUT Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: TAOUT output
Figure 9-4. Port 1 Low-Byte Control Register (P1CONL)
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PORT 2
I/O PORTS
Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. Port 2 pins are accessed directly by writing or reading
the port 2 data register, P2 at location E2H in set 1, bank 0. P2.0–P2.7 can serve as digital inputs, outputs (push
pull) or you can configure the following alternative functions:
— General-purpose digital I/O
— Alternative function: INT0– INT7
Port 2 Control Register (P2CONH, P2CONL)
Port 2 has two 8-bit control registers: P2CONH for P2.4–P2.7 and P2CONL for P2.0–P2.3. A reset clears the
P2CONH and P2CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to
select input or output mode (push-pull) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 2 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
When you select output mode, a push-pull circuit is configured. In input mode, three different selections are
available:
— Schmitt trigger input and interrupt generation on falling signal edges.
— Schmitt trigger input and interrupt generation on rising signal edges.
— Schmitt trigger input with pull up resister and interrupt generation on falling signal edges.
Port 2 Interrupt Enable and Pending Registers (P2INT, P2INTPND)
To process external interrupts at the port 2 pins, two additional control registers are provided: the port 2 interrupt
enable register P2INT (ECH, set 1, bank 0) and the port 2 interrupt pending register P2INTPND (EDH, set 1, bank 0).
The port 2 interrupt pending register P2INTPND lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear the pending
condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects interrupt requests by
polling the P2INTPND register at regular intervals.
When the interrupt enable bit of any port 4 pin is “1”, a rising or falling signal edge at that pin will generate an
interrupt request. The corresponding P2INTPND bit is then automatically set to “1” and the IRQ level goes low to
signal the CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application
software must clear the pending condition by writing a “0” to the corresponding P2INTPND bit.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Port 2 Control Register, High Byte (P2CONH)
EAH, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P2.7/INT7 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT7)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT7)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT7)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.5-.4] P2.6/INT6 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT6)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT6)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT6)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.3-.2] P2.5/INT5 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT5)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT5)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT5)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.1-.0] P2.4/INT4 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT4)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT4)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT4)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
Figure 9-5. Port 2 High-Byte Control Register (P2CONH)
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
Port 2 Control Register, Low Byte (P2CONL)
EBH, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P2.3/INT3 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT3)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT3)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT3)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.5-.4] P2.2/INT2 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT2)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT2)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT2)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.3-.2] P2.1/INT1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT1)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT1)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT1)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.1-.0] P2.0/INT0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT0)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT0)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT0)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
Figure 9-6. Port 2 Low-Byte Control Register (P2CONL)
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Port 2 Interrupt Pending Register (P2INTPND)
EDH, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
MSB
[.7] P2.7/PND7, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.6] P2.6/PND6, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.5] P2.5/PND5, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.4] P2.4/PND4, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.3] P2.3/PND3, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.2] P2.2/PND2, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.1] P2.1/PND1, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.0] P2.0/PND0, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
Figure 9-7. Port 2 Interrupt Pending Register (P2INTPND)
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
Port 2 Interrupt Control Register (P2INT)
ECH, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
MSB
[.7] P2.7 External Interrupt (INT7) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.6] P2.6 External Interrupt (INT6) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.5] P2.5 External Interrupt (INT5) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.4] P2.4 External Interrupt (INT4) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.3] P2.3 External Interrupt (INT3) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.2] P2.2 External Interrupt (INT2) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.1] P2.1 External Interrupt (INT1) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.0] P2.0 External Interrupt (INT0) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Figure 9-8. Port 2 Interrupt Control Register (P2INT)
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
PORT 3
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port that can be used for general-purpose digital I/O. The pins are accessed directly by writing
or reading the port 3 data register, P3 at location E3H in set 1, bank 0. P3.0–P3.7 can serve as inputs, outputs
(push pull) or you can configure the following alternative functions:
— General-purpose digital I/O
— Alternative function: ADC0– ADC7
Port 3 Control Register (P3CONH, P3CONL)
Port 3 has two 8-bit control registers: P3CONH for P3.4–P3.7 and P3CONL for P3.0–P3.3. A reset clears the
P2CONH and P2CONL registers to “00H”, configuring all pins to input mode. You use control registers settings to
select input or output mode (push-pull) and enable the alternative functions.
When programming the port, please remember that any alternative peripheral I/O function you configure using the
port 3 control registers must also be enabled in the associated peripheral module.
Port 3 Control Register, High Byte (P3CONH)
EEH, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P3.7/ADC7 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC7 input
[.5-.4] P3.6/ADC6 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC6 input
[.3-.2] P3.5/ADC5 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC5 input
[.1-.0] P3.4/ADC4 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC4 input
Figure 9-9. Port 3 High-Byte Control Register (P3CONH)
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
Port 3 Control Register, Low Byte (P3CONL)
EFH, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P3.3/ADC3 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC3 input
[.5-.4] P3.2/ADC2 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC2 input
[.3-.2] P3.1/ADC1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC1 input
[.1-.0] P3.0/ADC0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: ADC0 input
Figure 9-10. Port 3 Low-Byte Control Register (P3CONL)
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PORT 4
Port 4 is a 6-bit I/O port that you can use two ways:
— General-purpose digital I/O
— Alternative function: INT8– INT10, TBPWM
Port 4 is accessed directly by writing or reading the port 4 data register, P4 at location E4H in set 1, bank 0.
Port 4 Control Register (P4CONH, P4CONL)
Port 4 pins are configured individually by bit-pair settings in two control registers located in set 1, bank 0:
P4CONL (low byte, F1H) and P4CONH (high byte, F0H).
When you select output mode, a push-pull circuit is configured. In input mode, three different selections are
available:
— Schmitt trigger input and interrupt generation on falling signal edges.
— Schmitt trigger input and interrupt generation on rising signal edges.
— Schmitt trigger input with pull up resister and interrupt generation on falling signal edges.
Port 4 Interrupt Enable and Pending Registers (P4INT, P4INTPND)
To process external interrupts at the port 4 pins, two additional control registers are provided: the port 4 interrupt
enable register P4INT (F2H, set 1, bank 0) and the port 4 interrupt pending register P4INTPND (F3H, set 1, bank 0).
The port 4 interrupt pending register P4INTPND lets you check for interrupt pending conditions and clear the pending
condition when the interrupt service routine has been initiated. The application program detects interrupt requests by
polling the P4INTPND register at regular intervals.
When the interrupt enable bit of any port 4 pin is “1”, a rising or falling signal edge at that pin will generate an
interrupt request. The corresponding P4INTPND bit is then automatically set to “1” and the IRQ level goes low to
signal the CPU that an interrupt request is waiting. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request, application
software must clear the pending condition by writing a “0” to the corresponding P4INTPND bit.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
I/O PORTS
Port 4 Control Register, High Byte (P4CONH)
F0H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.4] Not used (must keep always 0)
[.3-.2] P4.5 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 X = Push-pull output mode
[.1-.0] P4.4 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 X = Push-pull output mode
Figure 9-11. Port 4 High-Byte Control Register (P4CONH)
Port 4 Control Register, Low Byte (P4CONL)
F1H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] P4.3/TBPWM Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up
0 1 = Input mode
1 0 = Push-pull output mode
1 1 = Alternative function mode: TBPWM output
[.5-.4] P4.2/INT10 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT10)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT10)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT10)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.3-.2] P4.1/INT9 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT9)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT9)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT9)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
[.1-.0] P4.0/INT8 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Input mode with pull-up; falling edge interrupt (INT8)
0 1 = Input mode; falling edge interrupt (INT8)
1 0 = Input mode; rising edge interrupt (INT8)
1 1 = Push-pull output mode
Figure 9-12. Port 4 Low-Byte Control Register (P4CONL)
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O PORTS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register (P4INTPND)
F3H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
MSB
[.7-.3] Not used (must keep always 0)
[.2] P4.2/PND10, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.1] P4.1/PND9, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
[.0] P4.0/PND8, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read) / Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read) / No effect (when write)
Figure 9-13. Port 4 Interrupt Pending Register (P4INTPND)
Port 4 Interrupt Control Register (P4INT)
F2H, Set1, Bank0, R/W, Reset value="00"
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
MSB
[.7-.3] Not used (must keep always 0)
[.2] P4.2 External Interrupt (INT10) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.1] P4.1 External Interrupt (INT9) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
[.0] P4.0 External Interrupt (INT8) Enable Bit
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Figure 9-14. Port 4 Interrupt Control Register (P4INT)
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BASIC TIMER
10
BASIC TIMER
OVERVIEW
BASIC TIMER (BT)
You can use the basic timer (BT) in two different ways:
— As a watchdog timer to provide an automatic reset mechanism in the event of a system malfunction.
— To signal the end of the required oscillation stabilization interval after a reset or a Stop mode release.
The functional components of the basic timer block are:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 4096, 1024 or 128) with multiplexer
— 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH, read-only)
— Basic timer control register, BTCON (set 1, D3H, read/write)
BASIC TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (BTCON)
The basic timer control register, BTCON, is used to select the input clock frequency, to clear the basic timer counter
and frequency dividers, and to enable or disable the watchdog timer function. It is located in set 1, address D3H, and
is read/write addressable using register addressing mode.
A reset clears BTCON to '00H'. This enables the watchdog function and selects a basic timer clock frequency of
fXX/4096. To disable the watchdog function, write the signature code '1010B' to the basic timer register control bits
BTCON.7–BTCON.4.
The 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (set 1, bank 0, FDH), can be cleared at any time during normal operation by
writing a "1" to BTCON.1. To clear the frequency dividers, write a "1" to BTCON.0.
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC TIMER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
D3H, Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Watchdog timer enable bit:
1010B = Disable watchdog function
Other value = Enable watchdog function
Divider clear bit:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear divider
Basic timer counter clear bit:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear BTCNT
Basic timer input clock selection bit:
00 = fxx/4096
01 = fxx/1024
10 = fxx/128
11 = fxx/1 (Not used)
Figure 10-1. Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BASIC TIMER
BASIC TIMER FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Watchdog Timer Function
You can program the basic timer overflow signal (BTOVF) to generate a reset by setting BTCON.7–BTCON.4 to any
value other than "1010B". (The "1010B" value disables the watchdog function.) A reset clears BTCON to "00H",
automatically enabling the watchdog timer function. A reset also selects the CPU clock (as determined by the
current CLKCON register setting), divided by 4096, as the BT clock.
The CPU is reset whenever a basic timer counter overflow occurs, During normal operation, the application program
must prevent the overflow, and the accompanying reset operation, from occurring. To do this, the BTCNT value must
be cleared (by writing a “1” to BTCON.1) at regular intervals.
If a system malfunction occurs due to circuit noise or some other error condition, the BT counter clear operation will
not be executed and a basic timer overflow will occur, initiating a reset. In other words, during the normal operation,
the basic timer overflow loop (a bit 7 overflow of the 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT) is always broken by a BTCNT
clear instruction. If a malfunction does occur, a reset is triggered automatically.
Oscillation Stabilization Interval Timer Function
You can also use the basic timer to program a specific oscillation stabilization interval following a reset or when Stop
mode has been released by an external interrupt.
In Stop mode, whenever a reset or an external interrupt occurs, the oscillator starts. The BTCNT value then starts
increasing at the rate of fxx/4096 (for reset), or at the rate of the preset clock source (for an external interrupt). When
BTCNT.4 overflows, a signal is generated to indicate that the stabilization interval has elapsed and to gate the clock
signal off to the CPU so that it can resume normal operation.
In summary, the following events occur when stop mode is released:
1. During stop mode, a power-on reset or an interrupt occurs to trigger the Stop mode release and oscillation
starts.
2. If a power-on reset occurred, the basic timer counter will increase at the rate of fxx/4096. If an external interrupt
is used to release stop mode, the BTCNT value increases at the rate of the preset clock source.
3. Clock oscillation stabilization interval begins and continues until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows.
4. When a BTCNT.4 overflow occurs, normal CPU operation resumes.
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BASIC TIMER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Bit 1
RESET or STOP
Data Bus
Bits 3, 2
Basic Timer Control Register
(Write '1010xxxxB' to disable)
Clear
fxx/4096
fxx/1024
fxx/128
8-Bit Up Counter
(BTCNT, Read-Only)
RESET
fxx
DIV
MUX
OVF
R
(note)
Start the CPU
Bit 0
NOTE:
During a power-on reset operation, the CPU is idle during the required oscillation
stabilization interval (until bit 4 of the basic timer counter overflows).
Figure 10-2. Basic Timer Block Diagram
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
11
8-BIT TIMER A/B
8-BIT TIMER A
OVERVIEW
The 8-bit timer A is an 8-bit general-purpose timer/counter. Timer A has three operating modes, you can select one
of them using the appropriate TACON setting:
— Interval timer mode (Toggle output at TAOUT pin)
— Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the TACAP pin
— PWM mode (TAPWM)
Timer A has the following functional components:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, or 64) with multiplexer
— External clock input pin (TACK)
— 8-bit counter (TACNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (TADATA)
— I/O pins for capture input (TACAP) or PWM or match output (TAOUT)
— Timer A overflow interrupt (IRQ1, vector C2H) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ1, vector C0H) generation
— Timer A control register, TACON (set 1, bank1, E1H, read/write)
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Timer A Interrupts (IRQ1, Vectors C0H and C2H)
The timer A module can generate two interrupts: the timer A overflow interrupt (TAOVF), and the timer A match/
capture interrupt (TAINT). TAOVF is interrupt level IRQ1, vector C2H. TAINT also belongs to interrupt level IRQ1, but
is assigned the separate vector address, C0H.
A timer A overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced. A
timer A match/capture interrupt, TAINT pending condition is also cleared by hardware when it has been serviced.
Interval Timer Function
The timer A module can generate an interrupt: the timer A match interrupt (TAINT). TAINT belongs to interrupt level
IRQ1, and is assigned the separate vector address, C0H.
When the timer A match interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically
by hardware.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated and TAOUT is toggled when the counter value is identical to the
value written to the timer A reference data register, TADATA. The match signal generates a timer A match interrupt
(TAINT, vector C0H) and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 10H to TADATA and 0AH to TACON, the counter will increment until it reaches
10H. At this point, the Timer A interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and counting resumes.
Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the TAOUT
pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the value written to
the Timer A data register, TADATA. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the counter. Instead, it
runs continuously, overflowing at FFH, and then continues incrementing from 00H.
Although you can use the match signal to generate a timer A overflow interrupt, interrupts are not typically used in
PWM-type applications. Instead, the pulse at the TAOUT pin is held to Low level as long as the reference data value
is less than or equal to ( £ ) the counter value and then the pulse is held to High level for as long as the data value is
greater than ( > ) the counter value. One pulse width is equal to t
• 256.
CLK
Capture Mode
In capture mode, a signal edge that is detected at the TACAP pin opens a gate and loads the current counter value
into the Timer A data register. You can select rising or falling edges to trigger this operation.
Timer A also gives you capture-input source: the signal edge at the TACAP pin. You select the capture input by
setting the value of the Timer A capture input selection bit in the port 0 control register, P0CONH, (set 1, bank 0,
E6H). When P0CONH.7-.6 is ‘00’ or ‘01’, the TACAP input or normal input is selected. When P0CONH.7-.6 is set to
1X, normal push-pull output is selected.
Both kinds of timer A interrupts can be used in capture mode: the timer A overflow interrupt is generated whenever a
counter overflow occurs; the timer A match/capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter value is loaded into
the Timer A data register.
By reading the captured data value in TADATA, and assuming a specific value for the timer A clock frequency, you
can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the TACAP pin.
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
TIMER A CONTROL REGISTER (TACON)
You use the timer A control register, TACON, to:
— Select the timer A operating mode (interval timer, capture mode and PWM mode)
— Select the timer A input clock frequency
— Clear the timer A counter, TACNT
— Enable the timer A overflow interrupt or timer A match/capture interrupt
— Clear timer A match/capture interrupt pending conditions
TACON is located in set 1, Bank 1 at address E1H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode.
A reset clears TACON to '00H'. This sets timer A to normal interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency of
fxx/1024, and disables all timer A interrupts. You can clear the timer A counter at any time during normal operation
by writing a "1" to TACON.3.
The timer A overflow interrupt (TAOVF) is interrupt level IRQ1 and has the vector address C2H. When a timer A
overflow interrupt occurs and is serviced by the CPU, the pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware.
To enable the timer A match/capture interrupt (IRQ1, vector C0H), you must write TACON.1 to "1". To generate the
exact time interval, you should write TACON.3 and .0 to “1”, which cleared counter and interrupt pending bit. When
interrupt service routine is served, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a ‘0’ to the interrupt
pending bit (TINTPND.0 or TINTPND.1).
Timer A Control Register (TACON)
E1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W, Reset: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer A input clock selection bit:
00 = fxx/1024
01 = fxx/256
Timer A start/stop bit:
0 = Stop timer A
1 = Start timer A
10 = fxx/64
11 = External clock (TACK)
Timer A match/capture interrupt
enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrrupt
Timer A operating mode selection bit:
00 = Interval mode (TAOUT mode)
01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge,
counter running, OVF can occur)
Timer A overflow interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable overflow interrupt
1 = Enable overflow interrrupt
10 = Capture mode (capture on falling edge,
counter running, OVF can occur)
11 = PWM mode (OVF interrupt and match
interrupt can occur)
Timer A counter clear bit:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear the timer A counter (
when write)
NOTE:
When th counter clear bit(.3) is set, the 8-bit counter is cleared and
it also is cleared automatically.
.
Figure 11-1. Timer A Control Register (TACON)
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BLOCK DIAGRAM
TACON.2
TAOVF
Overflow
Clear
TACON.7-.6
f xx/1024
Pending
Data Bus
8
TINTPND.1
TACON.0
f xx/256
M
8-bit Up-Counter
(Read Only)
TACON.3
U
X
f xx/64
TACK
TACON.1
Match
TAINT
8-bit Comparator
M
U
X
Pending
M
U
X
TINTPND.0
TACAP
Timer A Buffer Reg
TAOUT(TAPWM)
M
U
X
TACON.5.-4
TACON.5.4
Timer A Data Register
(Read/Write)
8
Data Bus
NOTES:
1. When PWM mode, match signal cannot clear counter.
2. Pending bit is located at TINTPND register.
Figure 11-2. Timer A Functional Block Diagram
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
8-BIT TIMER B
OVERVIEW
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 micro-controller has an 8-bit timer called timer B. Timer B, which can be used to
generate the carrier frequency of a remote controller signal. Also, it can be used as the programmable buzz signal
generator that makes a sound with a various frequency from 200Hz to 20kHz. These various frequencies can be used
to generate a melody sound.
Timer B has two functions:
— As a normal interval timer, generating a timer B interrupt at programmed time intervals.
— To generate a programmable carrier pulse for a remote control signal at P4.3.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
PG trigger signal
TBCON.6-.7
TBCON.2
TBCON.0
f xx/4
M
U
X
TBPWM(P4.3)
CLK
f xx/8
fxx/64
8-Bit
Down Counter
T-FF
TB Underflow
(TBUF)
fxx/256
TBCON.3
Repeat
Control
MUX
TBCON.1
TBINT
Timer B Data
Timer B Data
TBCON.4-.5
Low Byte Register
High Byte Register
8
8
Data Bus
Data Bus
NOTE: In case of setting TBCON.5-.4 at '10', the value of the TBDATAL register is loaded into
the 8-bit counter when the operation of the timer B starts. And then if a underflow occurs
in the counter, the value of the TBDATAH register is loaded into the value of the 8-bit counter.
However, if the next borrow occurs, the value of the TBDATAL register is loaded into the value of
the 8-bit counter. To output TBPWM as carrier wave, you have to set P4CONL.7-.6 as "11".
Figure 11-3. Timer B Functional Block Diagram
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
TIMER B CONTROL REGISTER (TBCON)
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
D0H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer B input clock selection bit:
00 = fxx/4
Timer B output flip-flop
control bit:
01 = fxx/8
10 = fxx/64
0 = T-FF is low
1 = T-FF is high
11 = fxx/256
Timer B mode selection bit:
0 = One-shot mode
1 = Repeating mode
Timer B interrupt time selection bit:
00 = Elapsed time for low data value
01 = Elapsed time for high data value
Timer B start/stop bit:
0 = Stop timer B
10 = Elapsed time for low and high data value
11 = Invaild setting
1 = Start timer B
Timer B interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Figure 11-4. Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
Timer B Data High-Byte Register (TBDATAH)
D1H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
MSB
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LSB
Reset Value: FFh
Timer B Data Low-Byte Register (TBDATAL)
D2H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value: FFh
Figure 11-5. Timer B Data Registers (TBDATAH, TBDATAL)
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
TIMER B PULSE WIDTH CALCULATIONS
tHIGH
tLOW
tLOW
To generate the above repeated waveform consisted of low period time, t
When T-FF = 0,
, and high period time, t
.
LOW
HIGH
t
t
= (TBDATAL + 1) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAL < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
= (TBDATAH + 1) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAH < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
LOW
HIGH
When T-FF = 1,
t
t
= (TBDATAH + 1) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAH < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
LOW
HIGH
= (TBDATAL + 1) x 1/fx, 0H < TBDATAL < 100H, where fx = The selected clock.
To make t
= 24 us and t
= 15 us. f
= 4 MHz, fx = 4 MHz/4 = 1 MHz
LOW
HIGH
OSC
When T-FF = 0,
t
t
= 24 us = (TBDATAL + 1) /fx = (TBDATAL + 1) x 1us, TBDATAL = 23.
= 15 us = (TBDATAH + 1) /fx = (TBDATAH + 1) x 1us, TBDATAH = 14.
LOW
HIGH
When T-FF = 1,
t
t
= 15 us = (TBDATAL + 1) /fx = (TBDATAL + 1) x 1us, TBDATAL = 14.
HIGH
LOW
= 24 us = (TBDATAH + 1) /fx = (TBDATAH + 1) x 1us, TBDATAH = 23.
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
0H
Timer B Clock
T-FF = '0'
TBDATAL = 01-FFH
TBDATAH = 00H
High
Low
Low
High
T-FF = '0'
TBDATAL = 00H
TBDATAH = 01-FFH
T-FF = '0'
TBDATAL = 00H
TBDATAH = 00H
T-FF = '1'
TBDATAL = 00H
TBDATAH = 00H
0H
100H
200H
Timer B Clock
E0
H
T-FF = '1'
TBDATAL = DFH
TBDATAH = 1FH
20H
E0
H
T-FF = '0'
TBDATAL = DFH
20H
TBDATAH = 1FH
T-FF = '1'
80H
TBDATAL = 7FH
TBDATAH = 7FH
80H
T-FF = '0'
80H
TBDATAL = 7FH
TBDATAH = 7FH
80H
Figure 11-6. Timer B Output Flip Flop Waveforms in Repeat Mode
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — To Generate 38 kHz, 1/3duty signal through P4.3
This example sets Timer B to the repeat mode, sets the oscillation frequency as the Timer B clock source, and
TBDATAH and TBDATAL to make a 38 kHz, 1/3 Duty carrier frequency. The program parameters are:
8.795
ms
17.59
ms
37.9 kHz 1/3 Duty
— Timer B is used in repeat mode
— Oscillation frequency is 16 MHz (0.0625 ms), fx=fxx/4=4MHz (0.25 ms)
— TBDATAH = 8.795 ms/0.25 ms = 35.18, TBDATAL = 17.59 ms/0.25 ms = 70.36
— Set P4.3 to TBPWM mode.
ORG
0100H
;
Reset address
START
DI
•
•
•
LD
LD
LD
TBDATAL,#(35-1)
TBDATAH,#(70-1)
TBCON,#00100111B
;
;
;
;
;
Set 17.5 ms
Set 8.75 ms
Clock Source ¬ fxx/4
Disable Timer B interrupt.
Select repeat mode for Timer B.
; Start Timer B operation.
; Set Timer B Output flip-flop (T-FF) high.
;
LD
P4CONLH,#03H
;
;
Set P4.3 to TBPWM mode.
This command generates 38 kHz, 1/3 duty pulse signal
through P4.3.
•
•
•
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — To generate a one pulse signal through P4.3
This example sets Timer B to the one shot mode, sets the oscillation frequency as the Timer B clock source, and
TBDATAH and TBDATAL to make a 40ms width pulse. The program parameters are:
40
ms
— Timer B is used in one shot mode
— Oscillation frequency is 4 MHz (fx=1/4 clock = 1ms)
— TBDATAH = 40 ms / 1 ms = 40, TBDATAL = 1
— Set P4.3 to TBPWM mode
ORG
0100H
;
Reset address
START
DI
•
•
•
LD
LD
LD
TBDATAH,# (40-1)
TBDATAL,# 1
TBCON,#00010001B
;
;
;
;
;
Set 40 ms
Set any value except 00H
Clock Source ¬ fxx/4
Disable Timer B interrupt.
Select one shot mode for Timer B.
; Stop Timer B operation.
; Set Timer B output flip-flop (T-FF) high
LD
P4CONL, #03H
;
Set P4.3 to TBPWM mode.
•
•
PULSE_OUT:LD
TBCON,#00000101B
;
;
;
;
Start Timer B operation
to make the pulse at this point.
After the instruction is executed, 0.75 ms is required
before the falling edge of the pulse starts.
•
•
•
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
8-BIT TIMER A/B
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Timer A
ORG
0000h
VECTOR
VECTOR
0C0h,TAMC_INT
0C2h,TAOV_INT
ORG
0100h
INITIAL:
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
SYM,#00h
;
;
;
Disable Global/Fast interrupt ® SYM
Enable IRQ1 interrupt
Set stack area
IMR,#00000010b
SPH,#00000000b
SPL,#00000000b
BTCON,#10100011b
;
Disable watch-dog
LD
P0CONH,#0C0H
; Enable TAOUT output
SB1
LD
TADATA,#80h
LD
TACON,#01001010b
;
;
Match interrupt enable
6.55 ms duration (10 MHz x'tal)
SB0
EI
MAIN:
·
·
MAIN ROUTINE
·
·
JR
T,MAIN
TAMC_INT:
·
·
Interrupt service routine
·
·
IRET
TAOV_INT:
·
Interrupt service routine
·
IRET
.END
11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-BIT TIMER A/B
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Timer B
ORG
0000h
VECTOR
ORG
0BEh,TBUN_INT
0100h
INITIAL:
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
SYM,#00h
;
;
;
Disable Global/Fast interrupt
Enable IRQ0 interrupt
Set stack area
IMR,#00000001b
SPH,#00000000b
SPL,#00000000b
BTCON,#10100011b
;
;
Disable Watch-dog
LD
P4CONL,#00000011b
Enable TBPWM output
LD
LD
LD
TBDATAH,#80h
TBDATAL,#80h
TBCON,#11101110b
;
;
Enable interrupt, fxx/256, Repeat
Duration 6.605ms (10 MHz x’tal)
EI
MAIN:
·
·
·
MAIN ROUTINE
·
·
·
JR
T,MAIN
TBUN_INT:
·
·
·
Interrupt service routine
·
·
·
IRET
.END
11-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
12
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
OVERVIEW
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 has two 16-bit timer/counters. The 16-bit timer 1(0,1) is an 16-bit general-purpose
timer/counter. Timer 1(0,1) has three operating modes, one of which you select using the appropriate T1CON0,
T1CON1 setting is
— Interval timer mode (Toggle output at T1OUT0, T1OUT1 pin)
— Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the T1CAP0, T1CAP1 pin
— PWM mode (T1PWM0, T1PWM1); PWM output shares their output port with T1OUT0, T1OUT1 pin
Timer 1(0,1) has the following functional components:
— Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 1024, 256, 64, 8, 1) with multiplexer
— External clock input pin (T1CK0, T1CK1)
— A 16-bit counter (T1CNTH0/L0, T1CNTH1/L1), a 16-bit comparator, and two 16-bit reference data register
(T1DATAH0/L0, T1DATAH1/L1)
— I/O pins for capture input (T1CAP0, T1CAP1), or match output (T1OUT0, T1OUT1)
— Timer 1(0) overflow interrupt (IRQ2, vector C6H) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ2, vector C4H) generation
— Timer 1(1) overflow interrupt (IRQ2, vector CAH) and match/capture interrupt (IRQ2, vector C8H) generation
— Timer 1(0) control register, T1CON0 (set 1, E8H, Bank 1, read/write)
— Timer 1(1) control register, T1CON1 (set 1, E9H, Bank 1, read/write)
12-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Timer 1(0,1) Interrupts (IRQ2, Vectors C4H, C6H, C8H and CAH)
The timer 1(0) module can generate two interrupts, the timer 1(0) overflow interrupt (T1OVF0), and the timer 1(0)
match/capture interrupt (T1INT0). T1OVF0 is interrupt level IRQ2, vector C6H. T1INT0 also belongs to interrupt level
IRQ2, but is assigned the separate vector address, C4H.
A timer 1(0) overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced. A
timer 1(0) match/capture interrupt, T1INT0 pending condition is also cleared by hardware when it has been serviced.
The timer 1(1) module can generate two interrupts, the timer 1(1) overflow interrupt (T1OVF1), and the timer 1(1)
match/capture interrupt (T1INT1). T1OVF1 is interrupt level IRQ2, vector CAH. T1INT1 also belongs to interrupt level
IRQ2, but is assigned the separate vector address, C8H.
A timer 1(1) overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware when it has been serviced. A
timer 1(1) match/capture interrupt, T1INT1 pending condition is also cleared by hardware when it has been serviced.
Interval Mode (match)
The timer 1(0) module can generate an interrupt: the timer 1(0) match interrupt (T1INT0). T1INT0 belongs to interrupt
level IRQ2, and is assigned the separate vector address, C4H. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated
and T1OUT0 is toggled when the counter value is identical to the value written to the Timer 1 reference data
registers, T1DATAH0 and T1DATAL0. The match signal generates a timer 1(0) match interrupt (T1INT0, vector C4H)
and clears the counter value.
The timer 1(1) module can generate an interrupt: the timer 1(1) match interrupt (T1INT1). T1INT1 belongs to interrupt
level IRQ2, and is assigned the separate vector address, C8H. In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated
and T1OUT1 is toggled when the counter value is identical to the value written to the Timer 1 reference data register,
T1DATAH1 and T1DATAL1. The match signal generates a timer 1(1) match interrupt (T1INT1, vector C8H) and clears
the counter value.
Capture Mode
In capture mode for timer 1(0), a signal edge that is detected at the T1CAP0 pin opens a gate and loads the current
counter value into the timer 1 data registers (T1DATAH0, T1DATAL0 for rising edge, or falling edge). You can select
rising or falling edge to trigger this operation. The timer 1(0) also gives you capture input source, the signal edge at
the T1CAP0 pin. You select the capture input by setting the value of the timer 1(0) capture input selection bit in the
port 0 control register high, P0CONH, (set 1 bank0, E6H).
Both kinds of timer 1(0) interrupts (T1OVF0, T1INT0) can be used in capture mode, the timer 1(0) overflow interrupt is
generated whenever a counter overflow occurs, the timer 1(0) capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter
value is loaded into the timer 1 data register.
By reading the captured data value in T1DATAH0, T1DATAL0, and assuming a specific value for the timer 1(0) clock
frequency, you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T1CAP0 pin.
In capture mode for Timer 1(1), a signal edge that is detected at the T1CAP1 pin opens a gate and loads the current
counter value into the timer 1 data register (T1DATAH1, T1DATAL1 for rising edge, or falling edge). You can select
rising or falling edges to trigger this operation. The timer 1(1) also gives you capture input source, the signal edge at
the T1CAP1 pin. You select the capture input by setting the value of the timer 1(1) capture input selection bit in the
port 0 control register low, P0CONL, (set 1 bank0, E7H).
Both kinds of timer 1(1) interrupts (T1OVF1, T1INT1) can be used in capture mode, the timer 1(1) overflow interrupt is
generated whenever a counter overflow occurs, the timer 1(1) capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter
value is loaded into the timer 1 data register.
By reading the captured data value in T1DATAH1, T1DATAL1, and assuming a specific value for the timer 1(1) clock
frequency, you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T1CAP1 pin.
12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
PWM Mode
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
Pulse width modulation (PWM) mode lets you program the width (duration) of the pulse that is output at the
T1OUT0, T1OUT1 pin. As in interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to
the value written to the timer 1(0,1) data registers. In PWM mode, however, the match signal does not clear the
counter but can generate a match interrupt. Instead, it runs continuously, overflowing at FFFFH, and then continuous
increasing from 0000H. Whenever an overflow occur, an overflow (T1OVF0,1) interrupt can be generated.
Although you can use the match or overflow interrupts in the PWM mode, these interrupts are not typically used in
PWM-type applications. Instead, the pulse at the T1OUT0, T1OUT1 pin is held to low level as long as the reference
data value is less than or equal to(£) the counter value and then the pulse is held to high level for as long as the data
value is greater than(>) the counter value. One pulse width is equal to tCLK.
TIMER 1(0,1) CONTROL REGISTER (T1CON0, T1CON1)
You use the timer 1(0,1) control register, T1CON0, T1CON1, to:
— Select the timer 1(0,1) operating mode (Interval timer, Capture mode, PWM mode)
— Select the timer 1(0,1) input clock frequency
— Clear the timer 1(0,1) counter, T1CNTH0/L0, T1CNTH1/L1
— Enable the timer 1(0,1) overflow interrupt
— Enable the timer 1(0,1) match/capture interrupt
T1CON0 is located in set 1 and Bank 1 at address E8H, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing
mode. T1CON1 is located in set 1 and Bank 1 at address E9H, and is read/write addressable using Register
addressing mode.
A reset clears T1CON0, T1CON1 to ‘00H’. This sets timer 1(0,1) to normal interval timer mode, selects an input
clock frequency of fxx/1024, and disables all timer 1(0,1) interrupts. To disable the counter operation, please set
T1CON(0,1).7-.5 to 111B. You can clear the timer 1(0,1) counter at any time during normal operation by writing a “1”
to T1CON(0,1).3.
The timer 1(0) overflow interrupt (T1OVF0) is interrupt level IRQ2 and has the vector address C6H. And, the timer 1(1)
overflow interrupt (T1OVF1) is interrupt level IRQ2 and has the vector address CAH.
To generate the exact time interval, you should write “1” to T1CON(0,1).2 and clear appropriate pending bits of the
TINTPND register.
To detect a match/capture or overflow interrupt pending condition when T1INT0, T1INT1 or T1OVF0, T1OVF1 is
disabled, the application program should poll the pending bit TINTPND register, bank 1, address E0H.
When a “1” is detected, a timer 1(0,1) match/capture or overflow interrupt is pending. When the sub-routine has been
serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a “0” to the interrupt pending bit. If interrupts
(match/capture or overflow) are enabled, the pending bit is cleared automatically by hardware.
12-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Timer 1 Control Register
(T1CON0) E8H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
(T1CON1) E9H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 1 clock source selection bit:
000 = fxx/1024
001 = fxx/256
Timer 1 overflow interrupt enable bit
0 = Disable overflow interrupt
1 = Enable overflow interrrupt
010 = fxx/64
011 = fxx/8
Timer 1 match/capture interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrrupt
100 = fxx
101 = External clock falling edge
110 = External clock rising edge
111 = Counter stop
Timer 1 counter clear bit:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear counter (Auto-clear bit)
Timer 1 operating mode selection bit:
00 = Interval mode
01 = Capture mode (capture on rising edge, OVF can occur)
10 = Capture mode (capture on falling edge, OVF can occur)
11 = PWM mode
NOTE: Interrupt pending bits are located in TINTPND register.
Figure 12-1. Timer 1(0,1) Control Register (T1CON0, T1CON1)
12-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
Timer A, Timer 1 Pending Register (TINTPND)
E0H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer A match/capture
interrupt
Not used
(must keep always 0)
pending bit
0 = No interrupt pending
1 = Interrrupt pending
Timer A overflow
interrupt
Timer 1(1) overflow interrupt
pending bit
pending bit
0 = No interrupt pending
1 = Interrrupt pending
0 = No interrupt pending
1 = Interrrupt pending
Timer 1(1) match/capture interrupt
pending bit
Timer 1(0) match/capture interrupt
pending bit
0 = No interrupt pending
1 = Interrrupt pending
0 = No interrupt pending
1 = Interrrupt pending
Timer 1(0) overflow interrupt pending bit
0 = No interrupt pending
1 = Interrrupt pending
Figure 12-2. Timer A, Timer 1(0,1) Pending Register (TINTPND)
12-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
BLOCK DIAGRAM
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
T1CON.7-.5
T1CON.0
T1OVF
Overflow
Clear
f xx/1024
f xx/256
f xx/64
Pending
Data Bus
8
TINTPND
f xx/8
fxx/1
M
U
X
16-bit Up-Counter
(Read Only)
T1CON.2
T1CK
S
V
S
T1CON.1
Match
T1INT
16-bit Comparator
16-bit Timer Buffer
M
U
X
Pending
M
TINTPND
T1CAP
U
X
T1OUT(T1PWM)
M
U
X
T1CON.4-.3
16-bit Timer Data Register
(T1DATAH/L)
T1CON.4.3
8
Data Bus
NOTES:
1. When PWM mode, match signal cannot clear counter.
2. Pending bit is located at TINTPND register.
Figure 12-3. Timer 1(0,1) Functional Block Diagram
12-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
16-BIT TIMER 1(0,1)
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Timer 1(0)
ORG
0000h
VECTOR
ORG
0C4h,TIM1_INT
0100h
INITIAL:
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
SYM,#00h
;
;
;
Disable Global/Fast interrupt
Enable IRQ2 interrupt
Set stack area
IMR,#00001000b
SPH,#00000000b
SPL,#00000000b
BTCON,#10100011b
;
Disable Watch-dog
SB1
LD
T1CON0,#01000110b
T1DATAH0,#00F0h
;
;
Enable interrupt, fxx/64, Interval,
Interval = 1.536 ms (10 MHz x’tal)
LDW
SB0
; T1DATAH0=00h, T1DATAL0=F0h
EI
MAIN:
·
·
·
MAIN ROUTINE
·
·
·
JR
T,MIAN
TIM1_INT:
·
·
·
Interrupt service routine
·
·
·
IRET
END
12-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
13
UART
OVERVIEW
The UART block has a full-duplex serial port with programmable operating modes: There is one synchronous mode
and three UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) modes:
— Shift Register I/O with baud rate of fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA+1))
— 8-bit UART mode; variable baud rate, fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA+1))
— 9-bit UART mode; variable baud rate, fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA+1))
UART receive and transmit buffers are both accessed via the data register, UDATA, is at address F5H. Writing to the
UART data register loads the transmit buffer; reading the UART data register accesses a physically separate receive
buffer.
When accessing a receive data buffer (shift register), reception of the next byte can begin before the previously
received byte has been read from the receive register. However, if the first byte has not been read by the time the
next byte has been completely received, the first data byte will be lost (Overrun error).
In all operating modes, transmission is started when any instruction (usually a write operation) uses the UDATA
register as its destination address. In mode 0, serial data reception starts when the receive interrupt pending bit
(UARTPND.1) is "0" and the receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) is "1". In mode 1 and 2, reception starts whenever an
incoming start bit ("0") is received and the receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) is set to "1".
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
To program the UART modules, follow these basic steps:
1. Configure P1.4 and P1.5 to alternative function (RXD (P1.4), TXD (P1.5)) for UART module by setting the
P1CONL register to appropriatly value.
2. Load an 8-bit value to the UARTCON control register to properly configure the UART I/O module.
3. For parity generation and check in UART mode 2, set parity enable bit (UARTPND.5) to “1”.
4. For interrupt generation, set the UART interrupt enable bit (UARTCON.1 or UARTCON.0) to "1".
5. When you transmit data to the UART buffer, write transmit data to UDATA, the shift operation starts.
6. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, UART pending bit (UARTPND.1 or UARTPND.0) is set
to "1" and an UART interrupt request is generated.
13-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART CONTROL REGISTER (UARTCON)
The control register for the UART is called UARTCON at address F6H. It has the following control functions:
— Operating mode and baud rate selection
— Multiprocessor communication and interrupt control
— Serial receive enable/disable control
— 9th data bit location for transmit and receive operations (mode 2)
— Parity generation and check for transmit and receive operations (mode 2)
— UART transmit and receive interrupt control
A reset clears the UARTCON value to "00H". So, if you want to use UART module, you must write appropriate value
to UARTCON.
13-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
UART Control Register (UARTCON)
F6H, Set1, Bank 0, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
MSB MS1 MS0 MCE RE
TB8 RB8 RIE
LSB
TIE
Transmit interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Operating mode and
baud rate selection bits
(see table below)
(1)
Multiprocessor communication
enable bit (mode 2 only):
0 = Disable
Received interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1 = Enable
If parity disable mode (PEN = 0),
location of the 9th data bit that was received in
UART mode 2 ("0" or "1").
Serial data receive enable bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
If parity enable mode (PEN = 1),
Even/odd parity selection bit for receive data in
UART mode 2.
If parity disable mode (PEN = 0),
location of the 9th data bit to be transmitted in
UART mode 2 ("0" or "1").
0 : Even parity check for the received data
1 : Odd parity check for the received data
If parity enable mode (PEN = 1),
Even/odd parity selection bit for transmit data in
UART mode 2;
0 : Even parity bit generation for transmit data
1 : Odd parity bit generation for transmit data
(2)
MS1 MS0 Mode Description
Baud Rate
0
0
1
0
1
x
0
1
2
Shift register
8-bit UART
9-bit UART
fxx / (16 x (16bit BRDATA + 1))
fxx / (16 x (16bit BRDATA + 1))
fxx / (16 x (16bit BRDATA + 1))
NOTES:
1. In mode 2, if the UARTCON.5 bit is set to "1" then the receive interrupt will not be
activated if the received 9th data bit is "0". In mode 1, if UARTCON.5 = "1" then the
receive interrut will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not received.
2. The descriptions for 8-bit and 9-bit UART mode do not include start and stop bits
for serial data receive and transmit.
3. Parity enable bits, PEN, is located in the UARTPND register at address F4H.
4. Parity enable and parity error check can be available in 9-bit UART mode
(Mode 2) only.
Figure 13-1. UART Control Register (UARTCON)
13-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART INTERRUPT PENDING REGISTER (UARTPND)
The UART interrupt pending register, UARTPND is located at address F4H. It contains the UART data transmit
interrupt pending bit (UARTPND.0) and the receive interrupt pending bit (UARTPND.1).
In mode 0 of the UART module, the receive interrupt pending flag UARTPND.1 is set to "1" when the 8th receive data
bit has been shifted. In mode 1 or 2, the UARTPND.1 bit is set to "1" at the halfway point of the stop bit's shift time.
When the CPU has acknowledged the receive interrupt pending condition, the UARTPND.1 flag must be cleared by
software in the interrupt service routine.
In mode 0 of the UART module, the transmit interrupt pending flag UARTPND.0 is set to "1" when the 8th transmit
data bit has been shifted. In mode 1 or 2, the UARTPND.0 bit is set at the start of the stop bit. When the CPU has
acknowledged the transmit interrupt pending condition, the UARTPND.0 flag must be cleared by software in the
interrupt service routine.
UART Pending Register (UARTPND)
F4H, Set1, Bank 0, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
.7
.6
PEN RPE
.3
.2
RIP TIP
MSB
LSB
Not used
(must keep always 0)
Not used
(must keep
always 0)
UART transmit interrupt pending flag
0 = Not pending
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt pending
UART parity enable/disable:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
UART receive interrupt pending flag:
UART receive parity error:
0 = No error
0 = Not pending
1 = Parity error
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt pending
NOTES:
1. In order to clear a data transmit or receive interrupt pendingflag, you must write a "0" to the
appropriate pending bit. A "0" has no effect.
2. To avoid errors, we recommend using load instruction (except for LDB), when manipulating
UARTPND values.
3. Parity enable and parity error check can be available in 9-bit UART mode (Mode 2) only.
4. Parity error bit (RPE) will be refreshed whenever 8th receive data bit has been shifted.
Figure 13-2. UART Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND)
13-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
th
In mode 2 (9-bit UART data), by setting the parity enable bit (PEN) of UARTPND register to '1', the 9 data bit of
th
transmit data will be an automatically generated parity bit. Also, the 9 data bit of the received data will be treated as
a parity bit for checking the received data.
In parity enable mode (PEN = 1), UARTCON.3 (TB8) and UARTCON.2 (RB8) will be a parity selection bit for transmit
and receive data respectively. The UARTCON.3 (TB8) is for settings of the even parity generation (TB8 = 0) or the
odd parity generation (TB8 = 0) in the transmit mode. The UARTCON.2 (RB8) is also for settings of the even parity
checking (RB8= 0) or the odd parity checking (RB8 =1) in the receive mode. The parity enable (generation/checking)
functions are not available in UART mode 0 and 1.
th
If you don’t want to use a parity mode, UARTCON.2 (RB8) and UARTCON.3 (TB8) are a normal control bit as the 9
data bit, in this case, PEN must be disable (“0”) in mode 2. Also it is needed to select the 9th data bit to be
transmitted by writing TB8 to "0" or "1".
th
The receive parity error flag (RPE) will be set to ‘0’ or ‘1’ depending on parity error whenever the 8 data bit of the
receive data has been shifted.
UART DATA REGISTER (UDATA)
UART Data Register (UDATA)
F5H, Set1, Bank 0, R/W, Reset Value: FFH
.7
.6
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
MSB
.5
LSB
Transmit or Receive data
Figure 13-3. UART Data Register (UDATA)
13-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART BAUD RATE DATA REGISTER (BRDATAH, BRDATAL)
The value stored in the UART baud rate register, (BRDATAH, BRDATAL), lets you determine the UART clock rate
(baud rate).
UART Baud Rate Data Register
(BRDATAH) EEH, Set1, Bank 0, R/W, Reset Value: FFH
(BRDATAL) EFH, Set1, Bank 0, R/W, Reset Value: FFH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.3
.0
LSB
.4
.2
.1
Brud rate data
Figure 13-4. UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATAH, BRDATAL)
BAUD RATE CALCULATIONS
The baud rate is determined by the baud rate data register, 16-bit BRDATA
Mode 0 baud rate = fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA + 1))
Mode 1 baud rate = fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA + 1))
Mode 2 baud rate = fxx/(16 ´ (16-bit BRDATA + 1))
13-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
Table 13-1. Commonly Used Baud Rates Generated by 16-bit BRDATA
Baud Rate Oscillation Clock BRDATAH
Decimal
BRDATAL
Decimal Hex
Hex
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
0H
1H
4H
0H
0H
0H
0H
230,400 Hz
11.0592 MHz
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
4
0
0
0
0
02
05
11
17
35
71
143
7
02H
05H
0BH
11H
23H
47H
8FH
7H
115,200 Hz
57,600 Hz
38,400 Hz
19,200 Hz
9,600 Hz
4,800 Hz
76,800 Hz
38,400 Hz
19,200 Hz
9,600 Hz
4,800 Hz
2,400 Hz
600 Hz
11.0592 MHz
11.0592 MHz
11.0592 MHz
11.0592 MHz
11.0592 MHz
11.0592 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
15
31
64
129
3
FH
10 MHz
1FH
40H
81H
3H
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
16
12
39
12
25
10H
0CH
27H
0CH
19H
38,461 Hz
12,500 Hz
19,230 Hz
9,615 Hz
8 MHz
8 MHz
4 MHz
4 MHz
13-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
BLOCK DIAGRAM
SAM88 Internal Data Bus
TB8
S
16 BIT
BRDATA
D
Q
UDATA
CLK
MS0
MS1
RxD (P1.4)
TxD (P1.5)
CLK
Baud Rate
Generator
fxx
Zero Detector
Write to
UDATA
Start
Shift
Tx Control
EN
Tx Clock
Send
TIP
TxD (P1.5)
Shift
Clock
TIE
Interrupt
RIE
Rx Clock RIP
Rx Control
Receive
Shift
RE
RIE
Start
1-to-0
Transition
Detector
Shift
Value
Bit Detector
Shift
Register
MS0
MS1
UDATA
RxD (P1.4)
SAM88 Internal Data Bus
Figure 13-5. UART Functional Block Diagram
13-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
UART MODE 0 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
In mode 0, UART is input and output through the RxD (P1.4) pin and TxD (P1.5) pin outputs the shift clock. Data is
transmitted or received in 8-bit units only. The LSB of the 8-bit value is transmitted (or received) first.
Mode 0 Transmit Procedure
1. Select mode 0 by setting UARTCON.6 and .7 to "00B".
2. Write transmission data to the shift register UDATA (F5H) to start the transmission operation.
Mode 0 Receive Procedure
1. Select mode 0 by setting UATCON.6 and .7 to "00B".
2. Clear the receive interrupt pending bit (UARTPND.1) by writing a "0" to UARTPND.1.
3. Set the UART receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) to "1".
4. The shift clock will now be output to the TxD (P1.5) pin and will read the data at the RxD (P1.4) pin. A UART
receive interrupt (vector E4H) occurs when UARTCON.1 is set to "1".
Write to Shift Register (UDATA)
Shift
RxD (Data Out)
TxD (Shift Clock)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TIP
Write to UARTPND (Clear RIP and set RE)
RIP
RE
Shift
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
RxD (Data In)
TxD (Shift Clock)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 13-6. Timing Diagram for UART Mode 0 Operation
13-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART MODE 1 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
In mode 1, 10-bits are transmitted (through the TxD (P1.5) pin) or received (through the RxD (P1.4) pin). Each data
frame has three components:
— Start bit ("0")
— 8 data bits (LSB first)
— Stop bit ("1")
When receiving, the stop bit is written to the RB8 bit in the UARTCON register. The baud rate for mode 1 is variable.
Mode 1 Transmit Procedure
1. Select the baud rate generated by 16bit BRDATA.
2. Select mode 1 (8-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 7 and 6 to '01B'.
3. Write transmission data to the shift register UDATA (F5H). The start and stop bits are generated automatically
by hardware.
Mode 1 Receive Procedure
1. Select the baud rate to be generated by 16-bit BRDATA.
2. Select mode 1 and set the RE (Receive Enable) bit in the UARTCON register to "1".
3. The start bit low ("0") condition at the RxD (P1.4) pin will cause the UART module to start the serial data receive
operation.
Tx
Clock
Write to Shift Register (UDATA)
Shift
TxD
TIP
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop Bit
Start Bit
Rx
Clock
RxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop Bit
Start Bit
Bit Detect Sample Time
Shift
RIP
Figure 13-7. Timing Diagram for UART Mode 1 Operation
13-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
UART MODE 2 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
In mode 2, 11-bits are transmitted (through the TxD pin) or received (through the RxD pin). Each data frame has four
components:
— Start bit ("0")
— 8 data bits (LSB first)
— Programmable 9th data bit or parity bit
— Stop bit ("1")
< In parity disable mode (PEN = 0) >
The 9th data bit to be transmitted can be assigned a value of "0" or "1" by writing the TB8 bit (UARTCON.3).
When receiving, the 9th data bit that is received is written to the RB8 bit (UARTCON.2), while the stop bit is ignored.
The baud rate for mode 2 is fosc/(16 x (16-bit BRDATA + 1)) clock frequency.
< In parity enable mode (PEN = 1) >
The 9th data bit to be transmitted can be an automatically generated parity of "0" or "1" depending on a parity
generation by means of TB8 bit (UARTCON.3). When receiving, the received 9th data bit is treated as a parity for
checking receive data by means of the RB8 bit (UARTCON.2), while the stop bit is ignored. The baud rate for mode
2 is fosc/(16 x (16-bit BRDATA + 1)) clock frequency.
Mode 2 Transmit Procedure
1. Select the baud rate generated by 16-bit BRDATA.
2. Select mode 2 (9-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 6 and 7 to '10B'. Also, select the 9th data bit to be
transmitted by writing TB8 to "0" or "1" and set PEN bit of UARTPND register to “0” if you don’t use a parity
mode. If you want to use the parity enable mode, select the parity bit to be transmitted by writing TB8 to "0" or
"1" and set PEN bit of UARTPND register to “1”.
3. Write transmission data to the shift register, UDATA (F5H), to start the transmit operation.
Mode 2 Receive Procedure
1. Select the baud rate to be generated by 16-bit BRDATA.
2. Select mode 2 and set the receive enable bit (RE) in the UARTCON register to "1".
3. If you don’t use a parity mode, set PEN bit of UARTPND register to “0” to disable parity mode.
If you want to use the parity enable mode, select the parity type to be check by writing TB8 to "0" or "1" and set
PEN bit of UARTPND register to “1”. Only 8 bits (Bit0 to Bit7) of received data are available for data value.
4. The receive operation starts when the signal at the RxD pin goes to low level.
13-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Tx
Clock
Write to Shift Register (UARTDATA)
Shift
TxD
TIP
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TB8 or Parity bit
Stop Bit
Start Bit
RB8 or Parity bit
Rx
Clock
RxD
Stop
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Start Bit
Bit Detect Sample Time
Shift
RIP
Figure 13-8. Timing Diagram for UART Mode 2 Operation
13-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
UART
SERIAL COMMUNICATION FOR MULTIPROCESSOR CONFIGURATIONS
The S3C9-series multiprocessor communication features let a "master" S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 send a multiple-
frame serial message to a "slave" device in a multi- S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 configuration. It does this without
interrupting other slave devices that may be on the same serial line.
This feature can be used only in UART mode 2 with the parity disable mode. In mode 2, 9 data bits are received. The
9th bit value is written to RB8 (UARTCON.2). The data receive operation is concluded with a stop bit. You can
program this function so that when the stop bit is received, the serial interrupt will be generated only if RB8 = "1".
To enable this feature, you set the MCE bit in the UARTCON registers. When the MCE bit is "1", serial data frames
that are received with the 9th bit = "0" do not generate an interrupt. In this case, the 9th bit simply separates the
address from the serial data.
Sample Protocol for Master/Slave Interaction
When the master device wants to transmit a block of data to one of several slaves on a serial line, it first sends out
an address byte to identify the target slave. Note that in this case, an address byte differs from a data byte: In an
address byte, the 9th bit is "1" and in a data byte, it is "0".
The address byte interrupts all slaves so that each slave can examine the received byte and see if it is being
addressed. The addressed slave then clears its MCE bit and prepares to receive incoming data bytes.
The MCE bits of slaves that were not addressed remain set, and they continue operating normally while ignoring the
incoming data bytes.
While the MCE bit setting has no effect in mode 0, it can be used in mode 1 to check the validity of the stop bit. For
mode 1 reception, if MCE is "1", the receive interrupt will be issue unless a valid stop bit is received.
13-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UART
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Setup Procedure for Multiprocessor Communications
Follow these steps to configure multiprocessor communications:
1. Set all S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 devices (masters and slaves) to UART mode 2 with parity disable.
2. Write the MCE bit of all the slave devices to "1".
3. The master device's transmission protocol is:
— First byte: the address
identifying the target
slave device (9th bit = "1")
— Next bytes: data
(9th bit = "0")
4. When the target slave receives the first byte, all of the slaves are interrupted because the 9th data bit is "1". The
targeted slave compares the address byte to its own address and then clears its MCE bit in order to receive
incoming data. The other slaves continue operating normally.
Full-Duplex Multi-S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 Interconnect
RxD
RxD
TxD
TxD
TxD
TxD
RxD
RxD
Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave n
. . .
S3C84E5/
C84E9/
P84E9
S3C84E5/
C84E9/
P84E9
S3C84E5/
C84E9/
P84E9
S3C84E5/
C84E9/
P84E9
Figure 13-9. Connection Example for Multiprocessor Serial Data Communications
13-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
WATCH TIMER
14
WATCH TIMER
OVERVIEW
Watch timer functions include real-time and watch-time measurement and interval timing for the system clock. To
start watch timer operation, set bit1 and bit 6 of the watch timer mode register, WTCON.1and 6, to “1”. After the
watch timer starts and elapses a time, the watch timer interrupt is automatically set to “1”, and interrupt requests
commence in 1.955 ms or 0.125, 0.25 and 0.5-second intervals.
The watch timer can generate a steady 0.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, or 4 kHz signal to the BUZZER output (BZOUT pin).
By setting WTCON.3 and WTCON.2 to “11b”, the watch timer will function in high-speed mode, generating an
interrupt every 1.955 ms. High-speed mode is useful for timing events for program debugging sequences.
— Real-time and Watch-time measurement
— Using a main system or subsystem clock source
— Buzzer output frequency generator
— Timing tests in high-speed mode
14-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCH TIMER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
WATCH TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (WTCON: R/W)
FAH
WTCON.7 WTCON.6 WTCON.5 WTCON.4 WTCON.3 WTCON.2 WTCON.1 WTCON.0
RESET
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
"0"
Table 14-1. Watch Timer Control Register (WTCON): Set 1, Bank 0, FAH, R/W
Bit Name
Values
Function
Select (fx/256) as the watch timer clock (fx: Main clock)
Select subsystem clock as watch timer clock
Disable watch timer interrupt
Address
WTCON.7
0
1
0
1
FAH
WTCON.6
Enable watch timer interrupt
WTCON.5–.4
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0.5 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
1 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
2 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
4 kHz buzzer (BZOUT) signal output
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.5 s.
WTCON.3–.2
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.25 s.
Set watch timer interrupt to 0.125 s.
Set watch timer interrupt to 1.955 ms.
Disable watch timer, clear frequency dividing circuits
Enable watch timer
WTCON.1
WTCON.0
0
1
0
1
Interrupt is not pending, clear pending bit when write
Interrupt is pending
NOTE: Main system clock frequency (fx) is assumed to be 9.8304 MHz
14-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
WATCH TIMER
WATCH TIMER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
BUZZER Output (BZOUT)
WTCON.6
WTCON.5
WTCON.4
MUX
WTINT
fW64(0.5 kHz)
fW32(1 kHz)
fW16(2 kHz)
fW8(4 kHz)
WTCON.3
WTCON.2
Enable/Disable
Selector
Circuit
WTCON.1
WTCON.0
6
fW2
fW22
fW23
fW24
1
Frequency
Dividing
Circuit
1
f
W
Clock
WTCON.7
1
Selector
1 Hz
32768 Hz
fXT
fx/256
f
X= Main System Clock (9.8304MHz)
fXT = Subsystem Clock (32768 Hz)
= Watch timer
f
W
Figure 14-1. Watch Timer Circuit Diagram
14-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WATCH TIMER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Using the Watch Timer
ORG
0000h
VECTOR
ORG
0CCh,WT_INT
0100h
INITIAL:
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
SYM,#00h
;
;
;
Disable Global/Fast interrupt
Enable IRQ3 interrupt
Set stack area
IMR,#00010000b
SPH,#00000000b
SPL,#0FFh
BTCON,#10100011b
WTCON,#11001110b
;
;
Disable Watch-dog
0.5 kHz buzzer, 1.955 ms duration interrupt
; Interrupt enable, (fxt: 32, 768Hz)
EI
MAIN:
·
·
·
MAIN ROUTINE
·
·
·
JR
T,MIAN
WT_INT:
·
·
·
AND
WTCON,#11111110b
;
pending clear
IRET
.END
14-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
A/D CONVERTER
15
A/D CONVERTER
OVERVIEW
The 10-bit A/D converter (ADC) module uses successive approximation logic to convert analog levels entering at one
of the eight input channels to equivalent 10-bit digital values. The analog input level must lie between the AV and
REF
AV
values. The A/D converter has the following components:
SS
— Analog compactor with successive approximation logic
— D/A converter logic (resistor string type)
— ADC control register, ADCON (set 1, bank 0, F7H, read/write, but ADCON.3 is read only)
— Eight multiplexed analog data input pins (ADC0–ADC7)
— 10-bit A/D conversion data output register (ADDATAH, ADDATAL)
— Internal AVREF and AVSS
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
To initiate an analog-to-digital conversion procedure, at first, you must configure P3.0–P3.7 to analog input before
A/D conversions because the P3.0 – P3.7 pins can be used alternatively as normal data I/O or analog input pins. To
do this, you load the appropriate value to the P3CONH, and P3CONL (for ADC0 – ADC7) register.
And you write the channel selection data in the A/D converter control register ADCON to select one of the eight
analog input pins (ADCn, n = 0–7) and set the conversion start or enable bit, ADCON.0. A 10-bit conversion
operation can be performed for only one analog input channel at a time. The read-write ADCON register is located in
set 1, bank 0 at address F7H.
During a normal conversion, ADC logic initially sets the successive approximation register to 200H (the approximate
half-way point of an 10-bit register). This register is then updated automatically during each conversion step. The
successive approximation block performs 10-bit conversions for one input channel at a time. You can dynamically
select different channels by manipulating the channel selection bit value (ADCON.6–.4) in the ADCON register.
To start the A/D conversion, you should set the enable bit, ADCON.0. When a conversion is completed, ADCON.3,
the end-of-conversion (EOC) bit is automatically set to 1 and the result is dumped into the ADDATAH, ADDATAL
registers where it can be read. The ADC module enters an idle state. Remember to read the contents of ADDATAH
and ADDATAL before another conversion starts. Otherwise, the previous result will be overwritten by the next
conversion result.
NOTE
Because the ADC does not use sample-and-hold circuitry, it is important that any fluctuations in the analog
level at the ADC0–ADC7 input pins during a conversion procedure be kept to an absolute minimum. Any
change in the input level, perhaps due to circuit noise, will invalidate the result.
15-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A/D CONVERTER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
A/D CONVERTER CONTROL REGISTER (ADCON)
The A/D converter control register, ADCON, is located in set1, bank 0 at address F7H. ADCON is read-write
addressable using 8-bit instructions only. But, the EOC bit, ADCON.3 is read only. ADCON has four functions:
— Bits 6–4 select an analog input pin (ADC0–ADC7).
— Bit 3 indicates the end of conversion status of the A/D conversion.
— Bits 2–1 select a conversion speed.
— Bit 0 starts the A/D conversion.
Only one analog input channel can be selected at a time. You can dynamically select any one of the eight analog
input pins, ADC0–ADC7 by manipulating the 3-bit value for ADCON.6–ADCON.4
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
F7H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W (ADCON.3 bit is read-only)
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used
(must keep always 0)
Start or Enable bit
0 = Disable Operation
1 = Start Operation
A/D Input Pin Selection bits:
Clock Selection bit:
.6.5.4
A/D Input pin
.2 .1 Conversion Clock
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
ADC0
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
ADC5
ADC6
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
fxx/16
fxx/8
fxx/4
fxx
End-of-Conversion bit (realy only):
0 = Conversion not complete
1 = Conversion complete
ADC7
Figure 15-1. A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
15-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
A/D CONVERTER
Conversion Data Register High Byte (ADDATAH)
F8H, Set 1, Bank 0, Read only
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Conversion Data Register Low Byte (ADDATAL)
F9H, Set 1, Bank 0, Read only
MSB
x
x
x
x
x
x
.1
.0
LSB
Figure 15-2. A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH, ADDATAL)
ADCON.4-.6
ADCON.2-.1
(Select one input pin of the assigned)
To ADCON.3
(EOC Flag)
fxx/16
fxx/8
fxx/4
fxx
Clock
M
u
Selector
ADCON.0
l
(ADC Enable)
t
i
Analog
Comparator
Input Pins
Successive
ADC0-ADC7
(P3.0-P3.7)
p
l
-
Approximation
Logic
+
e
x
e
r
ADCON.0
(A/D Conversion enable)
10-bit result is
loaded into
A/D Conversion
Data Register
AVref
AVss
Conversion Result
10-bit D/A
Converter
(ADDATAH,
ADDATAL)
To Data bus
Figure 15-3. A/D Converter Circuit Diagram
15-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A/D CONVERTER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
INTERNAL REFERENCE VOLTAGE LEVELS
In the ADC function block, the analog input voltage level is compared to the reference voltage. The analog input level
must remain within the range AVSS to AVREF (AVREF = VDD).
Different reference voltage levels are generated internally along the resistor tree during the analog conversion process
for each conversion step. The reference voltage level for the first bit conversion is always 1/2 AVREF.
CONVERSION TIMING
The A/D conversion process requires 4 steps (4 clock edges) to convert each bit and 10 clocks to step-up A/D
conversion. Therefore, total of 50 clocks is required to complete a 10-bit conversion: With a 10 MHz CPU clock
frequency, one clock cycle is 400 ns (4/fxx). If each bit conversion requires 4 clocks, the conversion rate is
calculated as follows:
4 clocks/bit x 10-bits + step-up time (10 clock) = 50 clocks
50 clock x 400 ns = 20 ms at 10 MHz, 1 clock time = 4/fxx
ADCON.0
50 ADC Clock
Conversion
Start
EOC
. .
ADDATA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
.
Previous
Value
Valid
Data
ADDATAH (8-Bit) + ADDATAL (2-Bit)
40 Clock
Set up
time
10 clock
Figure 15-4. A/D Converter Timing Diagram
15-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
A/D CONVERTER
INTERNAL A/D CONVERSION PROCEDURE
1. Analog input must remain between the voltage range of AVSS and AVREF.
2. Configure P3.0–P3.7 for analog input before A/D conversions. To do this, you load the appropriate value to the
P3CONH and P3CONL (for ADC0–ADC7) registers.
3. Before the conversion operation starts, you must first select one of the eight input pins (ADC0–ADC7) by writing
the appropriate value to the ADCON register.
4. When conversion has been completed, (50 clocks have elapsed), the EOC, ADCON.3 flag is set to "1", so that
a check can be made to verify that the conversion was successful.
5. The converted digital value is loaded to the output register, ADDATAH (8-bit) and ADDATAL (2-bit), then the ADC
module enters an idle state.
6. The digital conversion result can now be read from the ADDATAH and ADDATAL register.
VDD
Reference
Voltage
Input
R
104
AVref
VDD
Analog
ADC0-ADC7
Input Pin
101
S3C84E5/
S3C84E9/
S3P84E9
AVss
Vss
NOTE: The symbol "R" signifies an offset resistor with a value of
.
from 50 to 100
W
Figure 15-5. Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy
15-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A/D CONVERTER
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
F
PROGRAMMING TIP — Configuring A/D Converter
•
•
LD
LD
•
P3CONH, #11111111B
P3CONL, #11111111B
;
;
P3.7–P3.4 A/D Input MODE
P3.3–P3.0 A/D Input MODE
•
LD
ADCON, #00000001B
ADCON, #00001000B
Z, AD0_CHK
;
;
;
Channel ADC0, fxx, Conversion start
A/D conversion end ® EOC check
No
AD0_CHK: TM
JR
LD
LD
•
AD0BUFH, ADDATAH
AD0BUFL, ADDATAL
;
;
8-bit conversion data
2-bit conversion data
•
LD
AD3_CHK: TM
JR
ADCON, #00110001B
ADCON, #00001000B
Z, AD3_CHK
;
;
;
Channel ADC3, fxx, Conversion start
A/D conversion end ® EOC check
No
LD
LD
•
AD3BUFH, ADDATAH
AD3BUFL, ADDATAL
;
;
8-bit conversion data
2-bit conversion data
•
15-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
LOW VOLTAGE RESET
16
LOW VOLTAGE RESET
OVERVIEW
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 can be reset in four ways:
— by external power-on-Reset
— by the external nReset input pin pulled low
— by the digital watchdog timing out
— by the Low Voltage reset circuit (LVR)
During an external power-on reset, the voltage VDD is High level and the nRESET pin is forced Low level. The
RESET signal is input through a Schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This brings
the S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 into a known operating status. To ensure correct start-up, the user should take that
Reset signal is not released before the VDD level is sufficient to allow MCU operation at the chosen frequency.
The nRESET pin must be held to Low level for a minimum time interval after the power supply comes within tolerance
in order to allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize. The minimum required oscillation stabilization
time for a Reset is approximately 6.55 ms (@216/fosc, fosc = 10MHz).
When a Reset occurs during normal operation (with both VDD and nRESET at High level), the signal at the nRESET
pin is forced Low and the reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are then set to their
default hardware Reset values (see Table 8-1).
The MCU provides a watchdog timer function in order to ensure graceful recovery from software malfunction. If
watchdog timer is not refreshed before an end-of-counter condition (overflow) is reached, the internal Reset will be
activated.
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 has a built-in low voltage Reset circuit that allows detection of power voltage drop of
external VDD input level to prevent a MCU from malfunctioning in an unstable MCU power level. This voltage detector
works for the Reset operation of MCU. This Low Voltage reset includes an analog compactor and Vref circuit. The
value of a detection voltage is set internally by hardware. The on-chip Low Voltage Reset, features static reset when
supply voltage is below a reference voltage value (Typical 2.9 V). Thanks to this feature, external reset circuit can be
removed while keeping the application safety. As long as the supply voltage is below the reference value, there is an
internal and static RESET. The MCU can start only when the supply voltage rises over the reference voltage.
When you calculate power consumption, please remember that a static current of LVR circuit should be added a
CPU operating current in any operating modes such as Stop, Idle, and normal RUN mode.
16-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW VOLTAGE RESET
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Watchdog RESET
nRESET
N.F
Internal System
RESET
Longger than 1us
VDD
When the VDD level
is lower than 2.9V
VIN
+
Comparator
-
N.F
VREF
Longger than 1us
VDD
VREF
BGR
NOTES:
1. The target of voltage detection level is 2.9 V at VDD = 5 V
2. BGR is Band Gap voltage Reference
Figure 16-1. Low Voltage Reset Circuit
NOTE
To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you make the appropriate settings to the
basic timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic
timer watchdog function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can
disable it by writing '1010B' to the upper nibble of BTCON.
16-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ELECTRICAL DATA
17
ELECTRICAL DATA
OVERVIEW
In this chapter, S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 electrical characteristics are presented in tables and graphs. The
information is arranged in the following order:
— Absolute maximum ratings
— Input/output capacitance
— D.C. electrical characteristics
— A.C. electrical characteristics
— Oscillation characteristics
— Oscillation stabilization time
— Data retention supply voltage in stop mode
— UART timing characteristics in mode 0
— A/D converter electrical characteristics
17-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 17-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
(TA = 25 °C)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Rating
Unit
VDD
Supply voltage
–
– 0.3 to + 6.5
– 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
– 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
– 18
V
VI
Input voltage
All input ports
VO
IOH
Output voltage
Output current high
All output ports
One I/O pin active
mA
All I/O pins active
One I/O pin active
– 60
+ 30
IOL
Output current low
All I/O pins active
–
+ 200
°
TA
Operating
– 25 to + 85
C
temperature
TSTG
Storage temperature
–
– 65 to + 150
Table 17-2. Input/Output Capacitance
(TA = – 25 °C to 85 °C, VDD = 0 V )
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
CIN
Input capacitance
f = 1 MHz; unmeasured pins
are tied to VSS
–
–
10
pF
COUT
CIO
Output capacitance
I/O capacitance
17-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-3. D.C. Electrical Characteristics
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
VIH1
VDD = VLVR to 5.5V
All port and nRESET
0.8 VDD
VDD
Input high voltage
–
V
VIH2
VDD = VLVR to 5.5V
XIN and XTIN
VDD – 0.5
VIL1
VIL2
VOH
VDD = VLVR to 5.5V
All ports and nRESET
0.2VDD
0.4
Input low voltage
–
–
V
VDD = VLVR to 5.5V
XIN and XTIN
VDD = 5.5 V
IOH = – 1 mA
All ports
VDD – 1.0
Output high voltage
Output low voltage
–
–
V
V
VOL1
VOL2
ILIH1
V
DD = 5.5 V, IOL = 15 mA
Ports 0 and 4
DD = 5.5 V, IOL = 4 mA
–
0.4
2.0
V
Ports 1, 2 and 3
VIN = VDD
All input pins except ILIH2
Input high leakage
current
–
–
–
–
1
µA
ILIH2
ILIL1
ILIL2
VIN = VDD
XIN, XOUT and XTIN, XTOUT
20
VIN = 0 V
All input pins except and ILIL2
Input low leakage
current
– 1
– 20
VIN = 0 V
XIN, XOUT and XTIN, XTOUT
ILOH
ILOL
VOUT = VDD
Output high leakage
current
–
–
–
–
2
All output pins
VOUT = 0 V
Output low leakage
current
– 2
All output pins
17-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 17-3. D.C. Electrical Characteristics (Continued)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
RP1
Pull-up resistor
10
50
100
VDD = 5 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
kΩ
All I/O pins except nRESET
20
50
100
–
100
250
500
15
400
600
1000
30
V
DD = 3 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
All I/O pins except nRESET
DD = 5 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
nRESET only
DD = 3 V; VIN = 0 V, TA = 25°C
nRESET only
DD = 4.5 V to 5.5V
RP2
V
V
(2)
Supply current (1)
IDD1
V
mA
RUN mode
12 MHz CPU clock
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
8 MHz CPU clock
4
10
7
IDD2
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
3.4
Idle mode
12 MHz CPU clock
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
8 MHz CPU clock
1
2.5
IDD3
IDD4
IDD5
Sub operating: main-osc stop
–
–
–
100
150
uA
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
32768 Hz crystal oscillator
Sub idle mode: main-osc stop
90
80
140
100
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
32768 Hz crystal oscillator
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V,
TA = 25°C
Stop mode
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V,
TA = 25°C
–
45
80
Stop mode
NOTES:
1. Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors or external output current loads.
2.
3.
4.
I
and I
include a power consumption of subsystem oscillator.
DD1
DD2
I
and I
are the current when the main system clock oscillation stop and the subsystem clock is used.
DD3
DD4
I
is the current when the main and subsystem clock oscillation stop.
DD5
5. All currents (I
– I
) include the current consumption of LVR circuit.
DD1 DD5
17-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-4. A.C. Electrical Characteristics
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
VDD = 5 V
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
tINTH
Interrupt input
high, low width
(Ports 4)
180
–
–
ns
,
tINTL
tRSL
nRESET input
low width
Input
1.0
–
–
µs
NOTE: User must keep more large value then min value.
tINTL
tINTH
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
0.2 VDD
Figure 17-1. Input Timing for External Interrupts (Ports 4 and 6)
tRSL
RESET
0.2 VDD
Figure 17-2. Input Timing for RESET
17-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 17-5. Main Oscillator Frequency (fOSC1
(TA = – 25 °C + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
)
Oscillator
Clock Circuit
Test Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
Main crystal or
ceramic
1
–
12
MHz
XIN
XOUT
C1
C2
VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V
External clock
(main system)
1
–
12
XIN
XOUT
Table 17-6. Main Oscillator Clock Stabilization Time (tST1
(TA = – 25 °C + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
)
Oscillator
Test Condition
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
fOSC > 400 kHz;
Main crystal
–
–
10
ms
Oscillation stabilization occurs when VDD is equal
to the minimum oscillator voltage range.
Main ceramic
–
–
–
4
–
XIN input High and Low width (tXH, tXL)
tWAIT when released by a reset (1)
External clock
(main system)
50
ns
216/fOSC
Oscillator
stabilization
wait time
–
–
–
–
sec
tWAIT when released by an interrupt (2)
–
sec
NOTES:
1.
f
is the oscillator frequency.
OSC
2. The duration of the oscillator stabilization wait time, t
settings in the basic timer control register, BTCON.
, when it is released by an interrupt is determined by the
WAIT
17-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ELECTRICAL DATA
1/fOSC1
tXL
tXH
XIN
VDD - 0.5 V
0.4 V
Figure 17-3. Clock Timing Measurement at XIN
Table 17-7. Sub Oscillator Frequency (fOSC2
(TA = –25 C + 85 C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
)
°
°
Oscillator
Crystal
Clock Circuit
Test Condition
Min
32
Typ.
Max
Unit
Crystal oscillation frequency
C1 = 100 pF, C2 = 100 pF
R = 330 Ω
32.768
34
kHz
XTIN XTOUT
R
XTIN and XTOUT are connected
C1
C2
with R and C by soldering.
Table 17-8. Subsystem Oscillator (crystal) Stabilization Time (tST2
)
°
(TA = 25 C)
Oscillator
Test Condition
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
Normal mode
–
800
1600
ms
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
VDD = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
VDD = VLVR to 3.3 V
–
–
–
10
s
Strong mode
400
150
800
300
ms
NOTE: Oscillation stabilization time (t
) is the time required for the oscillator to it's normal oscillation when stop mode
ST2
is released by interrupts. The value Typ. and Max are measured by buzzer output signal after stop release.
For example in voltage range of 4.5 V to 5.5 V of normal mode, we can see the buzzer output signal within 400 ms
at our test condition.
17-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 17-9. Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Stop mode
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VDDDR
Data retention
supply voltage
2
–
5.5
v
IDDDR
Stop mode, VDDDR = 2.0 V
Data retention
supply current
–
–
8
µA
NOTE: Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors or external output current loads.
RESET
Oscillation
occurs
Stabilzation
Time
StopMode
DataRetention Mode
VDD
Normal
Operating
Mode
VDDDR
Executionof
STOPInstrction
nRESET
tWAIT
NOTE: tWAIT isthe same as4096 x 16 x 1/fOSC.
Figure 17-4. Stop Mode Release Timing Initiated by RESET
Oscillation
Stabilization Time
Idle Mode
Stop Mode
Data Retention Mode
VDD
VDDDR
Execution of
STOP Instruction
Normal
Operating Mode
Interrupt
0.2 VDD
tWAIT
NOTE:
tWAIT is the same as 4096 x 16 x BT clock
Figure 17-5. Stop Mode (Main) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts
17-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ELECTRICAL DATA
Oscillation
Stabilization Time
Idle Mode
Stop Mode
Data Retention Mode
VDD
VDDDR
Normal
Execution of
STOP Instruction
Operating Mode
Interrupt
0.2 VDD
tWAIT
NOTE:
When the case of select the fxx/128 for basic timer input
clock before enter the stop mode.
tWAIT = 128 x 16 x (1/32768) = 62.5 ms
Figure 17-6. Stop Mode (Sub) Release Timing Initiated by Interrupts
17-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 17-10. UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (10 MHz)
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V, Load capacitance = 80 pF)
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Typ.
Max
Unit
tSCK
Serial port clock cycle time
500
700
ns
tCPU × 6
tS1
tS2
Output data setup to clock rising edge
Clock rising edge to input data valid
Output data hold after clock rising edge
Input data hold after clock rising edge
Serial port clock High, Low level width
300
–
300
–
tCPU × 5
–
tCPU – 50
0
–
tCPU
–
tH1
tH2
–
tHIGH, tLOW
200
400
tCPU × 3
NOTES:
1. All timings are in nanoseconds (ns) and assume a 10-MHz CPU clock frequency.
2. The unit tCPU means one CPU clock period.
tSCK
tHIGH
tLOW
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
Figure 17-7. Waveform for UART Timing Characteristics
17-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 17-11. A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics
(TA = – 25 °C to + 85 °C, VDD = VLVR to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter
Resolution
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min
–
Typ.
10
Max
Unit
bit
–
VDD = 5.12 V
Total accuracy
–
–
LSB
± 3
Integral linearity
error
ILE
CPU clock = 10 MHz
AVREF = 5.12 V
–
± 2
AVSS = 0 V
Differential
linearity error
DLE
EOT
EOB
tCON
–
± 1
± 0.5
–
± 1
± 3
± 2
–
Offset error of
top
Offset error of
bottom
Conversion time
10-bit conversion
20
µs
(1)
50 x 4/fOSC (3), fOSC = 10 MHz
AVSS
2
AVREF
–
Analog input
voltage
VIAN
RAN
–
–
–
–
1000
–
V
MW
V
Analog input
impedance
VDD
Analog
AVREF
2.5
reference
voltage
VSS
–
VSS + 0.3
10
Analog ground
AVSS
IADIN
–
–
–
AVREF = VDD = 5 V
Analog input
current
µA
conversion time = 20 µs
AVREF = VDD = 5 V
Analog block
current (2)
IADC
1
3
mA
conversion time = 20 µs
AVREF = VDD = 3 V
0.5
100
1.5
500
conversion time = 20 µs
AVREF = VDD = 5 V
nA
when power down mode
NOTES:
1. "Conversion time" is the time required from the moment a conversion operation starts until it ends.
2.
I
is operating current during A/D conversion.
ADC
OSC
3.
f
is the main oscillator clock.
17-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Table 17-12. LVR (Low Voltage Reset) Circuit Characteristics
°
(TA = 25 C)
Parameter
LVR voltage level
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
°
VLVR
2.6
2.9
3.2
V
TA = 25 C
Main Oscillator Frequency
CPU Clock
12 MHz
8 MHz
1 MHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VLVR
5.5 V
Supply Voltage (V)
Minimum instruction clock = 1/4 Oscillator clock
Figure 17-8. Operating Voltage Range
VDD
104
VSS
S3C84E5/C84E9/
P84E9
Figure 17-9. The Circuit Diagram to Improve EFT Characteristics
NOTE: To improve EFT characteristics, we recommend using power capacitor near S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 like
Figure 17-9.
17-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
MECHANICAL DATA
18
MECHANICAL DATA
OVERVIEW
The S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9 microcontrollers are available in a 42-SDIP-600, 44-QFP-1010 package.
#42
#22
0-15
42-SDIP-600
#1
#21
39.50 MAX
39.10 ?0.20
0.50 ?0.10
1.00 ?0.10
1.78
(1.77)
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 18-1. 42-SDIP-600 Package Dimensions
18-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL DATA
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
13.20 ± 0.3
10.00 ± 0.2
0-8°
0.15+- 00..1005
44-QFP-1010
0.10 MAX
#44
0.05 MIN
2.05 ± 0.10
2.30 MAX
0.35 +- 00..1005
#1
0.80
(1.00)
NOTE: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 18-2. 44-QFP-1010 Package Dimensions
18-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
OTP VERSION
19
S3P84E9 OTP VERSION
OVERVIEW
The S3P84E9 single-chip CMOS microcontroller is the OTP (One Time Programmable) version of the
S3C84E5/C84E9 microcontroller. It has an on-chip EPROM instead of a masked ROM. The EPROM is accessed
by serial data format.
The S3P84E9 is fully compatible with the S3C84E5/C84E9, both in function in D.C. electrical characteristics and
in pin configuration. Because of its simple programming requirements, the S3P84E9 is ideal as an evaluation chip
for the S3C84E5/C84E9.
P1.0/TAOUT
P1.1/T1CK0
P1.2/T1OUT0
P1.3/BZOUT
P1.4/RXD
P1.5/TXD
P3.7/ADC7
P3.6/ADC6
P3.5/ADC5
P3.4/ADC4
P3.3/ADC3
P3.2/ADC2
P3.1/ADC1
P3.0/ADC0
AVss
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
TACAP/P0.7
TACK/P0.6
T1CAP0/P0.5
T1OUT1/P0.4
T1CK1/P0.3
T1CAP1/P0.2
XTout/P0.1
XTin/P0.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDAT/TBPWM/P4.3
SCLK/INT10/P4.2
VDD
9
S3P84E9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Top View
VSS
Xout
Xin
(42-SDIP)
VPP/TEST
INT9/P4.1
INT8/P4.0
nRESET
INT0/P2.0
INT1/P2.1
INT2/P2.2
AVref
P2.7/INT7
P2.6/INT6
P2.5/INT5
P2.4/INT4
P2.3/INT3
Figure 19-1. S3P84E9 Pin Assignments (42-SDIP Package)
19-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTP VERSION
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
P1.4/RXD
P1.5/TXD
P3.7/ADC7
P3.6/ADC6
P3.5/ADC5
P3.4/ADC4
P3.3/ADC3
P3.2/ADC2
P3.1/ADC1
P3.0/ADC0
AVss
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
XTout/P0.1
XTin/P0.0
SDAT/TBPWM/P4.3
SCLK/INT10/P4.2
VDD
S3P84E9
VSS
Xout
Xin
Top View
(44-QFP)
VPP/TEST
INT9/P4.1
INT8/P4.0
9
10
11
Figure 19-2. S3P84E9 Pin Assignments (44-QFP Package)
19-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
OTP VERSION
Table 19-1. Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the OTP
During Programming
Main Chip
Pin Name
Pin Name
Pin No.
I/O
Function
P4.3
SDAT
9(3)
I/O
Serial data pin. Output port when reading and
input port when writing. Can be assigned as a
input or push-pull output port.
P4.2
SCLK
VPP
10(4)
15(9)
I
I
Serial clock pin. Input only pin.
TEST
Power supply pin for EPROM cell writing (indicates
that OTP enters into the writing mode).
When 12.5 V is applied, OTP is in writing mode
and when 5 V is applied, OTP is in reading mode.
(Option)
nRESET
VDD/VSS
nRESET
VDD/VSS
18(12)
I
Chip Initialization
Logic power supply pin. VDD should be tied to +5 V
during programming.
11(12)/5(6)
–
NOTE: ( ) means 44 QFP package.
Table 19-2. Comparison of S3P84E9 and S3C84E5/C84E9 Features
Characteristic S3P84E9 S3C84E5/C84E9
32K-byte EPROM
Program memory
16/32K-byte mask ROM
VLVR to 5.5 V
Operating voltage (VDD
)
VLVR to 5.5 V
VDD = 5 V, VPP (TEST) = 12.5 V
OTP programming mode
Pin configuration
42-SDIP/44-QFP
42-SDIP/44-QFP
EPROM programmability
User Program 1 time by programmer
Programmed at the factory
OPERATING MODE CHARACTERISTICS
When 12.5 V is supplied to the VPP (TEST) pin of the S3P84E9, the EPROM programming mode is entered. The
operating mode (read, write, or read protection) is selected according to the input signals to the pins listed in
Table 19-3 below.
Table 19-3. Operating Mode Selection Criteria
VDD
VPP
REG/
MEM
Address
(A14–A0)
R/W
Mode
(TEST)
5 V
5 V
0
0
0
1
xxxxH
xxxxH
xxxxH
0E3FH
1
0
1
0
EPROM read
12.5 V
12.5 V
12.5 V
EPROM program
EPROM verify
EPROM read protection
NOTE: "0" means Low level; "1" means High level.
19-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OTP VERSION
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
NOTES
19-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
20
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
OVERVIEW
Samsung provides a powerful and easy-to-use development support system on a turnkey basis. The development
support system is composed of a host system, debugging tools, and supporting software. For a host system, any
standard computer that employs Win95/98/2000 as its operating system can be used. A sophisticated debugging
tool is provided both in hardware and software: the powerful in-circuit emulator, SMDS2+ or SK-1000, for the S3C7-,
S3C9-, and S3C8- microcontroller families. SMDS2+ is a newly improved version of SMDS2, and SK-1000 is
supported by a third party tool vendor. Samsung also offers supporting software that includes, debugger, an
assembler, and a program for setting options.
SHINE
Samsung Host Interface for In-Circuit Emulator, SHINE, is a multi-window based debugger for SMDS2+. SHINE
provides pull-down and pop-up menus, mouse support, function/hot keys, and context-sensitive hyper-linked help. It
has an advanced, multiple-windowed user interface that emphasizes ease of use. Each window can be easily sized,
moved, scrolled, highlighted, added, or removed.
SASM
The SASM is a re-locatable assembler for Samsung's S3C8-series microcontrollers. The SASM takes a source file
containing assembly language statements and translates them into a corresponding source code, an object code
and comments. The SASM supports macros and conditional assembly. It runs on the MS-DOS operating system.
As it produces the re-locatable object codes only, the user should link object files. Object files can be linked with
other object files and loaded into memory. SASM requires a source file and an auxiliary register file
(device_name.reg) with device specific information.
SAMA ASSEMBLER
The Samsung Arrangeable Microcontroller (SAM) Assembler, SAMA, is a universal assembler, and generating an
object code in the standard hexadecimal format. Assembled program codes include the object code used for ROM
data and required In-circuit emulators program control data. To assemble programs, SAMA requires a source file and
an auxiliary definition (device_name.def) file with device specific information.
HEX2ROM
HEX2ROM file generates a ROM code from a HEX file which is produced by the assembler. A ROM code is needed
to fabricate a microcontroller which has a mask ROM. When generating a ROM code (.OBJ file) by HEX2ROM, the
value "FF" is automatically filled into the unused ROM area, up to the maximum ROM size of the target device.
20-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
TARGET BOARDS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Target boards are available for all the S3C8-series microcontrollers. All the required target system cables and
adapters are included on the device-specific target board. TB84E5/84E9 is a specific target board for the
S3C84E5/C84E9 and S3P84E9 development.
OTP
One time programmable microcontrollers (OTP) for the S3C84E5/C84E9, and OTP programmers (SPW2plus: Single
socket programmer, GW-PRO2: Gang programmer) are now available.
OTP PROGRAMMING SOCKET ADAPTER
When you program S3P84E9 OTPs by using ICE or SPW2plus programmers, you need OTP socket adapter to
mount OTP devices on the programmers. In case of S3P84E9, there are SA-44QFP and SA-42SDIP socket
adapters for it’s 44QFP and 42SDIP packages respectively.
IBM-PC AT or Compatible
Emulator (SMDS2+ or SK-1000)
RS-232C
Target
Application
System
PROM/OTP Writer
Unit
RAM Break/Display Unit
Trace/Timer Unit
Probe
Adapter
TB84E5/84E9
POD
Target
SAM8 Base Unit
Board
EVA
Chip
Power Supply Unit
Figure 20-1. SMDS+ or SK-1000 Product Configuration
20-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
TB84E5/84E9 TARGET BOARD
The TB84E5/84E9 target board is used for the S3C84E5/C84E9 and the S3P84E9 microcontroller.
It is supported by the SMDS2+ or SK-1000 development system (In-Circuit Emulator). Figure 20-2. TB84E5/84E9
Target Board Configuration
TB84E5/84E9
To User_VCC
Off
On
Idle
+
Stop
+
RESET
74HC11
25
J101
U1
1
2
144 QFP
S3E84E0
EVA Chip
1
44
43
External
Triggers
P0.0 P0.1
USE PORT
CH1
CH2
X-tal
(32KHz)
XTin XTout
USE SUB OSC
SMDS
SMDS2+
SM13XXA
Figure 20-2. S3C84E5/S3C84E9/S3P84E9 Target Board Configuration
20-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Comments
Table 20-1. Power Selection Settings for TB84E5/84E9
Operating Mode
To User_Vcc' Settings
SMDS2+ or SK-1000 supplies
to the target board
To User_VDD
TB84E5/E9
V
DD
Target
System
Off
On
VDD
VSS
(evaluation chip) and the target
system.
VDD
SMDS2+ or SK-1000
TB84E5/E9
SMDS2+ or SK-1000 supplies
To User_VDD
External
VDD
V
only to the target board
DD
Target
System
Off
On
(evaluation chip). The target
system must have a power
supply of its own.
VSS
VDD
SMDS2+ or SK-1000
Table 20-2. Using Single Header Pins as the Input Path for External Trigger Sources
Target Board Part
Comments
Connector from
External Trigger
Sources of the
Application System
External
Triggers
Ch1
Ch2
You can connect an external trigger source to one of the two external
trigger channels (CH1 or CH2) for the SMDS2+ breakpoint and trace
functions.
IDLE LED
This LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E84E0) is in idle mode.
STOP LED
This LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E84E0) is in stop mode.
PORT (P0.0, P0.1) SELECTION (SUB-OSC OR NORMAL INPUT)
In the debugging your program by using SMDS2+ or SK-1000, you can select the subsystem oscillator 32,768Hz
crystal or normal input port 0.0 and 0.1.
20-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
Table 20-3. The Port 0.0 and Port 0.1 selection setting
“Sub-OSC” Setting Description
If you set the Sub-OSC to the XTin and XTout side,
32,768Hz-subsystem crystal will be connected to P0.0
and P0.1 pins, and these pins are isolated to the user
system.
P0.0
P0.1
XTin
XTout
If you set the Sub-OSC to the P0.0 and P0.1 side,
32,768Hz-subsystem crystal will be disconnected to
P0.0 and P0.1 pins, and these pins are connected to
the user system through J101.
XTin
P0.0
P0.1
XTout
J101
XTout/P0.1
1
3
5
7
XTin/P0.0
2
4
6
TBPWM/P4.3
VDD
INT10/P4.2
VSS
XIN
XOUT
8
TEST
P4.0/INT8
INT0/P2.0
9
10
12
P4.1/INT9
nRESET
P2.1/INT1
P2.3/INT3
P2.5/INT5
P2.7/INT7
AVREF
11
13
15
17
19
21
14
16
18
20
22
INT2/P2.2
INT4/P2.4
INT6/P2.6
P4.5
23
25
27
29
AVSS
P3.1/ADC1
P3.3/ADC3
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
P3.0/ADC0
P3.2/ADC2
P3.4/ADC4
P3.6/ADC6
P1.5/TXD
P1.3/BZOUT
P1.1/T1CK0
P3.5/ADC5
P3.7/ADC7
P1.4/RXD
P1.2/T1OUT0
P1.0/TAOUT
31
33
35
37
39
P0.7/TACAP
TACK/P0.6
T1OUT1/P0.4
T1CAP1/P0.2
P0.5/T1CAP0
P0.3/T1CK1
P4.4
42
44
41
43
Figure 20-3. 44-Pin Connector Pin Assignment for TB84E5/84E9
20-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
S3C84E5/C84E9/P84E9
Target Board
J101
Target System
2
1
2
1
Part Name: AS20D
Order Cods: SM6304
43 44
43 44
Figure 20-4. TB84E5/84E9 Adapter Cable for 44pin Connector Package
20-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C8- SERIES MASK ROM ORDER FORM
Product description:
Device Number: S3C84E___- ________ write down the ROM code number)
Product Order Form: Package Pellet Wafer Package Type: __________
Package Marking (Check One):
Standard
Custom A
(Max 10 chars)
Custom B
(Max 10 chars each line)
@ YWW
Device Name
@ YWW
@ YWW
Device Name
SEC
@ : Assembly site code, Y : Last number of assembly year, WW : Week of assembly
Delivery Dates and Quantities:
Deliverable
ROM code
Required Delivery Date
Quantity
Comments
–
Not applicable
See ROM Selection Form
Customer sample
Risk order
See Risk Order Sheet
Please answer the following questions:
F For what kind of product will you be using this order?
New model
Upgrade of an existing model
Replacement of an existing model
Others
If you are replacing an existing model, please indicate the former product name
(
)
F What are the main reasons you decided to use a Samsung microcontroller in your product?
Please check all that apply.
Price
Product quality
Features and functions
Delivery on time
Development system
Used same MCU before
Technical support
Quality of documentation
Samsung reputation
Mask Charge (US$ / Won):
Customer Information:
____________________________
Company Name:
___________________
Telephone number
_________________________
Signatures:
________________________
(Person placing the order)
__________________________________
(Technical Manager)
(For duplicate copies of this form, and for additional ordering information, please contact your local
Samsung sales representative. Samsung sales offices are listed on the back cover of this book.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C8- SERIES
REQUEST FOR PRODUCTION AT CUSTOMER RISK
Customer Information:
Company Name:
Department:
Telephone Number:
Date:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
__________________________
__________________________
Fax: _____________________________
Risk Order Information:
Device Number:
S3C84E___- ________ (write down the ROM code number)
Package:
Number of Pins: ____________
Package Type: _____________________
Intended Application:
Product Model Number:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Customer Risk Order Agreement:
We hereby request SEC to produce the above named product in the quantity stated below. We believe our risk order
product to be in full compliance with all SEC production specifications and, to this extent, agree to assume
responsibility for any and all production risks involved.
Order Quantity and Delivery Schedule:
Risk Order Quantity:
Delivery Schedule:
_____________________ PCS
Delivery Date (s)
Quantity
Comments
Signatures:
_______________________________
(Person Placing the Risk Order)
_______________________________________
(SEC Sales Representative)
(For duplicate copies of this form, and for additional ordering information, please contact your local
Samsung sales representative. Samsung sales offices are listed on the back cover of this book.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S3C84E5/C84E9 MASK OPTION SELECTION FORM
Device Number:
S3C84E___-________(write down the ROM code number)
Attachment (Check one):
Diskette
PROM
Customer Checksum:
Company Name:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Signature (Engineer):
Please answer the following questions:
F Application (Product Model ID: _______________________)
Audio
Video
Telecom
LCD Databank
Industrials
Remocon
Caller ID
Home Appliance
Other
LCD Game
Office Automation
Please describe in detail its application
(For duplicate copies of this form, and for additional ordering information, please contact your local
Samsung sales representative. Samsung sales offices are listed on the back cover of this book.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|